第3品·安立品巴利
3. Nikkhepakaṇḍo
985 到这一步为止,善三法已经按照一切善等法的分别方式详细解说完毕。不过,既然这里说的是善三法的分别方式,那么其余的三法和二法也同样适用这个分别方式——就像在这里,通过“哪些法与乐受相应?当欲界善心生起……”等逐步推演,智者能够在一切三法和二法中都把握分别方式——所以,暂且放下详细教示,为了用另一种既不过于简略也不过于详细的讲法来展示一切三法和二法的法之分类,便开始了“安立品”,也就是“哪些法是善”。心生起品是详细教示,注释品是简略教示。而这个安立品,相对于心生起品来说是简略的,相对于注释品来说是详细的,所以它具有简略和详细兼具的性质。应当知道,这个部分叫作“安立品”,既因为它是在放下详细教示之后才说的,也因为前面所说的理由。正如所说的那样——巴利
985. Ettāvatā kusalattiko sabbesaṃ kusalādidhammānaṃ padabhājananayena vitthārito hoti. Yasmā pana yvāyaṃ kusalattikassa vibhajananayo vutto, sesatikadukānampi eseva vibhajananayo hoti – yathā hi ettha, evaṃ ‘katame dhammā sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ vā…pe… ye vā pana tasmiṃ samaye aññepi atthi paṭiccasamuppannā arūpino dhammā ṭhapetvā vedanākhandhaṃ, ime dhammā sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā’tiādinā anukkamena sabbatikadukesu sakkā paṇḍitehi vibhājananayaṃ sallakkhetuṃ – tasmā taṃ vitthāradesanaṃ nikkhipitvā, aññena nātisaṅkhepanātivitthāranayena sabbatikadukadhammavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ katame dhammā kusalāti nikkhepakaṇḍaṃ āraddhaṃ. Cittuppādakaṇḍañhi vitthāradesanā, aṭṭhakathākaṇḍaṃ saṅkhepadesanā. Idaṃ pana nikkhepakaṇḍaṃ cittuppādakaṇḍaṃ upādāya saṅkhepo, aṭṭhakathākaṇḍaṃ upādāya vitthāroti saṅkhittavitthāradhātukaṃ hoti. Tayidaṃ, vitthāradesanaṃ nikkhipitvā desitattāpi, heṭṭhā vuttakāraṇavasenāpi, nikkhepakaṇḍaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
从根本、从蕴,也从门、从地来观察;
从含义和法理来看,也从名称和特征来看;
先安立好,再加以宣说,所以叫安立。巴利
Mūlato khandhato cāpi, dvārato cāpi bhūmito; Atthato dhammato cāpi, nāmato cāpi liṅgato; Nikkhipitvā desitattā, nikkhepoti pavuccatīti.
这一段是用“三善根”等这样的方式,从根的角度安立之后再说出来的。用“与它相应的受蕴”来说,是从蕴的角度安立。用“由它等起的身业”来说,是从门的角度安立,因为通过身门生起的业就称为身业。用“在乐地、在欲界”来说,是从地的角度安立之后再说出来的。由于在各处是依照义、法、名、相来说的,所以应当知道,这是从义等角度安立之后再说出来的。巴利
Idañhi tīṇi kusalamūlānītiādinā nayena mūlato nikkhipitvā desitaṃ. Taṃsampayutto vedanākkhandhoti khandhato. Taṃsamuṭṭhānaṃ kāyakammanti dvārato. Kāyadvārappavattañhi kammaṃ kāyakammanti vuccati. Sukhabhūmiyaṃ, kāmāvacareti bhūmito nikkhipitvā desitaṃ. Tattha tattha atthadhammanāmaliṅgānaṃ vasena desitattā atthādīhi nikkhipitvā desitaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ.
在这当中,解说善词时,先说“三”,这是数量上的限定。它们既是善,又是根;或者说,因为以因、缘、来源、生起、等起、令生的意义作为善法的根,所以叫善根。这样从含义上说明之后,现在要从名称上说明,所以说“无贪、无瞋、无痴”。到这里,因为不存在脱离了根还能叫善的法,所以法王用三个根把四地善全部统摄起来显示。“与它相应”,就是与无贪等相应。其中,与无贪相应的行蕴,无瞋、无痴也算入与无贪相应的行蕴数目里;依其余两个根相应时,也是同样的道理。这样,法王又以相应的四蕴把四地善全部统摄起来显示。“由它等起”,就是由无贪等所等起。按这个道理,法王也以三种业门把那些四地善全部统摄起来显示。这样,善先在三个层面上被统摄显示出来。巴利
Tattha kusalapadaniddese tāva tīṇīti gaṇanaparicchedo. Kusalāni ca tāni mūlāni ca, kusalānaṃ vā dhammānaṃ hetupaccayapabhavajanakasamuṭṭhānanibbattakaṭṭhena mūlānīti kusalamūlāni. Evaṃ atthavasena dassetvā idāni nāmavasena dassetuṃ alobho adoso amohoti āha. Ettāvatā yasmā mūlena muttaṃ kusalaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā catubhūmakakusalaṃ tīhi mūlehi pariyādiyitvā dassesi dhammarājā. Taṃsampayuttoti tehi alobhādīhi sampayutto. Tattha alobhena sampayutte saṅkhārakkhandhe, adosāmohāpi alobhena sampayuttasaṅkhārakkhandhagaṇanaṃyeva gacchanti. Sesadvayavasena sampayogepi eseva nayo. Iti catubhūmakakusalaṃ puna taṃsampayuttakacatukkhandhavasena pariyādiyitvā dassesi dhammarājā. Taṃsamuṭṭhānanti tehi alobhādīhi samuṭṭhitaṃ. Imināpi nayena tadeva catubhūmikakusalaṃ tiṇṇaṃ kammadvārānaṃ vasena pariyādiyitvā dassesi dhammarājā. Evaṃ tāva kusalaṃ tīsu ṭhānesu pariyādiyitvā dassitaṃ.
986 不善方面也是同样的道理。因为十二种不善心里,没有哪一种是脱离根的,也没有被称为脱离根的,所以法王用根把它们全部涵盖显示出来。再者,没有超出与它们相应的四蕴之外的不善,所以用四蕴把十二种不善心全部涵盖显示出来。法王又因为它们在身业等门类上都有生起的本性,所以用业门把它们全部涵盖显示出来。这里所说的“彼一处之烦恼”等文中,“一处”是指安住于同一个心或同一个人之中。安住于同一个心的,叫俱生一处;安住于同一个人的,叫断除一处。与那贪等烦恼或其他在各地被指出的法共同安住于一处,就是“彼一处”。其中,“哪些法是杂染的杂染分?三不善根——贪、嗔、痴,以及彼一处之烦恼”,出现在杂染三法中;“哪些法是劣?三不善根——贪、嗔、痴,以及彼一处之烦恼”,出现在劣三法中;“哪些法是不善?三不善根——贪、嗔、痴,以及彼一处之烦恼”,出现在这善三法中;“哪些法是杂染?三不善根——贪、嗔、痴,以及彼一处之烦恼”,出现在烦恼聚中;“哪些法是有诤?三不善根——贪、嗔、痴,以及彼一处之烦恼”,出现在有诤二法中——在这些地方,“俱生一处”出现了。巴利
986. Akusalepi eseva nayo. Dvādasannañhi akusalacittānaṃ ekampi mūlena muttaṃ nāma natthīti mūlena pariyādiyitvā dassesi dhammarājā. Taṃsampayuttacatukkhandhato ca uddhaṃ akusalaṃ nāma natthīti tāneva dvādasa akusalacittāni catukkhandhavasena pariyādiyitvā dassesi. Dhammarājā kāyakammādivasena pana nesaṃ pavattisabbhāvato kammadvāravasena pariyādiyitvā dassesi dhammarājā. Yaṃ panettha tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesātiādi vuttaṃ, tattha ekasmiṃ citte puggale vā ṭhitanti ‘ekaṭṭhaṃ’. Tattha ekasmiṃ citte ṭhitaṃ sahajekaṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti. Ekasmiṃ puggale ṭhitaṃ pahānekaṭṭhaṃ nāma. Tena lobhādinā aññena vā tattha tattha niddiṭṭhena saha ekasmiṃ ṭhitanti tadekaṭṭhaṃ. Tattha ‘katame dhammā saṃkiliṭṭhasaṃkilesikā? Tīṇi akusalamūlāni – lobho doso moho, tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesā’ti saṃkiliṭṭhattike; ‘katame dhammā hīnā? Tīṇi akusalamūlāni – lobho doso moho, tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesā’ti hīnattike ‘katame dhammā akusalā? Tīṇi akusalamūlāni – lobho doso moho, tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesā’ti imasmiṃ kusalattike; ‘katame dhammā saṃkiliṭṭhā? Tīṇi akusalamūlāni – lobho doso moho, tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesā’ti kilesagocchake ‘katame dhammā saraṇā? Tīṇi akusalamūlāni – lobho doso moho, tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesāti saraṇaduke’ti – imesu ettakesu ṭhānesu ‘sahajekaṭṭhaṃ’ āgataṃ.
在“应见所断三法”里,说的是“这三结以及和它们同处的烦恼”;在“应见所断因三法”里,说的也是“这三结以及和它们同处的烦恼”。接着,就在同一处说到三结——有身见、疑、戒禁取,这些法是应见所断的;与它们同处的贪、嗔、痴,这些法是应见所断的因;与它们同处的烦恼,以及和它们相应的受蕴……乃至……识蕴,由它们所生起的身业、语业、意业,这些法是应见所断因。在《正勤分别》中说:“其中,哪些是恶不善法?三不善根——贪、嗔、痴,以及和它们同处的烦恼。”应当知道,在这些地方出现的是“断除同处”。巴利
Dassanenapahātabbattike pana ‘imāni tīṇi saṃyojanāni, tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesā’ti, dassanenapahātabbahetukattikepi ‘imāni tīṇi saṃyojanāni, tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesā’ti, puna tattheva tīṇi saṃyojanāni – sakkāyadiṭṭhi vicikicchā sīlabbataparāmāso, ime dhammā dassanenapahātabbā; tadekaṭṭho lobho doso moho, ime dhammā dassanenapahātabbahetū; tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesā taṃsampayutto vedanākhandho…pe… viññāṇakkhandho, taṃsamuṭṭhānaṃ kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ manokammaṃ, ime dhammā dassanenapahātabbahetukāti; sammappadhānavibhaṅge ‘‘tattha katame pāpakā akusalā dhammā? Tīṇi akusalamūlāni – lobho doso moho, tadekaṭṭhā ca kilesā’’ti (vibha. 391) – imesu pana ettakesu ṭhānesu ‘pahānekaṭṭhaṃ’ āgatanti veditabbaṃ.
987 无记词的解释,其义本来就清楚。在这个三法组里,三种特征、三种施设、遍处撤除后的虚空、无碍虚空、无所有处的所缘以及灭尽定,都找不到,这样说。巴利
987. Abyākatapadaniddeso uttānatthoyevāti. Imasmiṃ tike tīṇi lakkhaṇāni tisso paññattiyo kasiṇugghāṭimākāsaṃ ajaṭākāsaṃ ākiñcaññāyatanassa ārammaṇaṃ nirodhasamāpatti ca na labbhatīti vuttaṃ.
988 在受三法分别的解说中,关于“乐地”这个词:就像“铜地”“黑地”本身就是指铜和黑一样,乐本身也叫作乐地。又像“甘蔗地”“稻田”是指甘蔗和稻子生长的地方,同样,乐生起的地方——心,也叫作乐地。这里指的就是这个意思。不过,因为那乐地有时在欲界,有时在色界等地,所以为了显示它的这些差别,就说了“在欲界”等话。除开乐受:就是把那乐地当中的乐受除开。与它相应:就是与那被除开的乐受相应。剩下两个词,也应当按同样的方式理解其含义。巴利
988.Vedanāttikaniddese sukhabhūmiyanti ettha yathā tambabhūmi kaṇhabhūmīti tambakaṇhabhūmiyova vuccanti, evaṃ sukhampi sukhabhūmi nāma. Yathā ucchubhūmi sālibhūmīti ucchusālīnaṃ uppajjanaṭṭhānāni vuccanti, evaṃ sukhassa uppajjanaṭṭhānaṃ cittampi sukhabhūmi nāma. Taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Yasmā pana sā kāmāvacare vā hoti, rūpāvacarādīsu vā, tasmāssā taṃ pabhedaṃ dassetuṃ kāmāvacaretiādi vuttaṃ. Sukhavedanaṃ ṭhapetvāti yā sā sukhabhūmiyaṃ sukhavedanā, taṃ ṭhapetvā. Taṃsampayuttoti tāya ṭhapitāya sukhavedanāya sampayutto. Sesapadadvayepi imināva nayena attho veditabboti.
在这个三法组里,三种受、一切色、涅槃,这些也是找不到的。因为这个三法组,脱离了在善三法组里也找不到的那些法,以及这三个部分,所以就叫作“脱离”。不过,在后面的三法组和二法组里,凡是依巴利文和义理应当说的,全都已经按词序在论母解说和善等分别里说过了。至于哪里有什么特别之处,我们就只讲那个。巴利
Imasmiṃ tike tisso vedanā, sabbaṃ rūpaṃ, nibbānanti idampi na labbhati. Ayañhi tiko kusalattike ca alabbhamānehi imehi ca tīhi koṭṭhāsehi muttako nāma. Ito paresu pana tikadukesu pāḷito ca atthato ca yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā taṃ sabbaṃ padānukkamena mātikākathāyañceva kusalādīnaṃ niddese ca vuttameva. Yaṃ pana yattha visesamattaṃ tadeva vakkhāma.
991 在异熟三法这一组里,先说一点:色法和无色法一样,确实也有由业所生的,但因为色法没有所缘对象,所以它们不像业。只有有所缘的无色法,因为与业相似,才被称为异熟,就像与种子相似的果实一样。比如播下稻种后,即使芽、叶等长出来了,也不叫稻果。只有当稻穗成熟、饱满时,那与种子相似的稻子才叫稻果。而芽、叶等,则说是从种子生出来的,是种子的产物。同样地,对于色法,只能说它是业所生,或者说是业所执受的。巴利
991. Tattha vipākattike tāva kiñcāpi arūpadhammā viya rūpadhammāpi kammasamuṭṭhānā atthi, anārammaṇattā pana te kammasarikkhakā na hontīti sārammaṇā arūpadhammāva kammasarikkhakattā vipākāti vuttā, bījasarikkhakaṃ phalaṃ viya. Sālibījasmiñhi vapite aṅkurapattādīsu nikkhantesupi sāliphalanti na vuccati. Yadā pana sālisīsaṃ pakkaṃ hoti pariṇataṃ, tadā bījasarikkhako sāli eva sāliphalanti vuccati. Aṅkurapattādīni pana bījajātāni bījato nibbattānīti vuccanti, evameva rūpampi kammajanti vā upādiṇṇanti vā vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
994 在“所执受三法”这一节里,虽然漏尽者的诸蕴会成为那些说“我们的舅父长老”“我们的小父长老”的他人执取的缘,但道、果、涅槃并没有被执取,也没有被把持,它们本来就是无执受的。因为就像整天烧热的铁球不会成为苍蝇停落的缘一样,它们由于火界极为强盛,也不会成为以渴爱、慢、邪见去执取的缘。因此说:这些法是无执受、非执取所依。巴利
994.Upādiṇṇattike kiñcāpi khīṇāsavassa khandhā ‘amhākaṃ mātulatthero amhākaṃ cūḷapitutthero’ti vadantānaṃ paresaṃ upādānassa paccayā honti, maggaphalanibbānāni pana aggahitāni aparāmaṭṭhāni anupādiṇṇāneva. Tāni hi, yathā divasaṃ santatto ayoguḷo makkhikānaṃ abhinisīdanassa paccayo na hoti, evameva tejussadattā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena gahaṇassa paccayā na honti. Tena vuttaṃ – ime dhammā anupādiṇṇaanupādāniyāti.
998 对于不杂染、非杂染的诸法,道理也同样如此。巴利
998. Asaṃkiliṭṭhaasaṃkilesikesupi eseva nayo.
1000 在寻三法中,伴随着与寻俱生的伺,善三法中不可得者确实不可得。巴利
1000.Vitakkattike vitakkasahajātena vicārena saddhiṃ kusalattike alabbhamānāva na labbhanti.
1003 在喜俱行三法这一组里,喜等心所把自己所具有的“喜俱行”等状态给了与它们同时生起的诸法,而它们自己反倒被排除在外。在这个三法组中,两种忧俱行的心生起、苦俱行的身识、舍受、色、涅槃——这些也都找不到。这个三法组,正是脱离了在善三法组中找不到的那些法,以及这五种情况,所以叫做“脱离”。巴利
1003.Pītisahagatattike pītiādayo attanā sahajātadhammānaṃ pītisahagatādibhāvaṃ datvā sayaṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakā jātā. Imasmiñhi tike dve domanassasahagatacittuppādā dukkhasahagataṃ kāyaviññāṇaṃ upekkhāvedanā rūpaṃ nibbānanti – idampi na labbhati. Ayañhi tiko kusalattike ca alabbhamānehi imehi ca pañcahi koṭṭhāsehi muttako nāma.
1006 在“见所断三法”这一组里,“结”指的是系缚。“有身见”的意思是:在存在的意义上,对于被称为五蕴聚合的这个身体,认为有一个“我”;或者认为“我”存在于那个身体当中,这种见解就叫“有身见”。至于执取“靠戒就能清净,靠禁行就能清净,靠戒和禁行就能清净”,这种执取就叫“戒禁取”。巴利
1006.Dassanenapahātabbattike saññojanānīti bandhanāni. Sakkāyadiṭṭhīti vijjamānaṭṭhena sati khandhapañcakasaṅkhāte kāye; sayaṃ vā satī tasmiṃ kāye diṭṭhīti ‘sakkāyadiṭṭhi’. Sīlena sujjhituṃ sakkā, vatena sujjhituṃ sakkā, sīlavatehi sujjhituṃ sakkāti gahitasamādānaṃ pana sīlabbataparāmāso nāma.
1007 “此处”是一个表示地点的不变词。它有时是依世间而说的。比如经中说:“此处,如来出现于世间。”有时指教法。比如经中说:“比丘们,就在此处有第一沙门,就在此处有第二沙门。”有时指空间。比如经中说:巴利
1007.Idhāti desāpadese nipāto. Svāyaṃ katthaci lokaṃ upādāya vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.189). Katthaci sāsanaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241). Katthaci okāsaṃ. Yathāha –
我就安住在这里,身为天神,保持正念。
而且我又重新获得了寿命,贤友,你应当这样知道。巴利
‘‘Idheva tiṭṭhamānassa, devabhūtassa me sato; Punarāyu ca me laddho, evaṃ jānāhi mārisā’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.369);
在某些地方,这只是为了补足音节而已。就像所说的:“比丘们,在这里,我应当已经吃过了、吃饱了。”(中部1.30)但在这里,应当知道这是就世间而说的。巴利
Katthaci padapūraṇamattameva. Yathāha – ‘‘idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’ti (ma. ni. 1.30). Idha pana lokaṃ upādāya vuttoti veditabbo.
这里,“未闻的凡夫”应当理解为:由于没有教法与证得,所以称为未闻。对于蕴、界、处、缘起、念处等,因为不曾学习、询问、抉择,能遮止邪见的“教”就不存在;因为还没有证得应当通过修行证得的,“证”也不存在。所以,由于没有教与证,就应当知道这是未闻。这个人……巴利
Assutavā puthujjanoti ettha pana ‘āgamādhigamābhāvā ñeyyo assutavā iti’. Yassa hi khandhadhātuāyatanapaccayākārasatipaṭṭhānādīsu uggahaparipucchāvinicchayarahitattā diṭṭhipaṭisedhako neva ‘āgamo’, paṭipattiyā adhigantabbassa anadhigatattā neva ‘adhigamo’ atthi, so ‘āgamādhigamābhāvā ñeyyo assutavā iti’. Svāyaṃ –
因为种种生起等原因,所以叫凡夫。
因为被包含在凡夫当中,所以这个人就是凡夫。巴利
Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano; Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano iti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.51; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.130; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 88; netti. aṭṭha. 56);
他之所以是凡夫,是因为种种烦恼等法以种种方式生起等种种原因。正如经中所说:“他们让种种烦恼生起,所以是凡夫;他们没有破除有身见,所以是凡夫;他们仰望众多导师的面孔,所以是凡夫;他们未能从一切生趣中出离,所以是凡夫;他们造作种种不同的行,所以是凡夫;他们被种种不同的暴流冲走,所以是凡夫;他们被种种不同的热恼所逼恼,所以是凡夫;他们被种种不同的燃烧所烧灼,所以是凡夫;他们对五种欲乐贪染、贪求、被贪缚、迷醉、执取、附着、黏着、被障碍,所以是凡夫;他们被五盖覆盖、包围、笼罩、封闭、隐藏、遮蔽,所以是凡夫。”(大义释94)或者,因为这样的人被归入那些超越计数、背离圣法、行卑劣法的人之中,所以是凡夫。或者,这个“凡夫”是单独算作一类,与具足戒、多闻等功德的圣者们分隔开来的众生,所以是凡夫。以上这些,就是“无闻凡夫”这两个词所指的——巴利
So hi puthūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesādīnaṃ jananādīhi kāraṇehi puthujjano. Yathāha – ‘‘puthu kilese janentīti puthujjanā. Puthu avihatasakkāyadiṭṭhikāti puthujjanā. Puthu satthārānaṃ mukhullokikāti puthujjanā. Puthu sabbagatīhi avuṭṭhitāti puthujjanā. Puthu nānābhisaṅkhāre abhisaṅkharontīti puthujjanā. Puthu nānāoghehi vuyhantīti puthujjanā. Puthu nānāsantāpehi santappantīti puthujjanā. Puthu nānāpariḷāhehi pariḍayhantīti puthujjanā. Puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattā giddhā gadhitā mucchitā ajjhosannā laggā laggitā palibuddhāti puthujjanā. Puthu pañcahi nīvaraṇehi āvutā nivutā ovutā pihitā paṭicchannā paṭikujjitāti puthujjanā’’ti (mahāni. 94). Puthūnaṃ vā gaṇanapathamatītānaṃ ariyadhammaparammukhānaṃ nīcadhammasamācārānaṃ janānaṃ antogadhattāpi puthujjanā. Puthu vā ayaṃ – visuṃyeva saṅkhyaṃ gato, visaṃsaṭṭho sīlasutādiguṇayuttehi ariyehi – janotipi puthujjano. Evametehi ‘assutavā puthujjano’ti dvīhi padehi ye te –
佛陀、太阳族已宣说了两种凡夫:
一种是盲凡夫,另一种是贤善凡夫。巴利
‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.51; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.130; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 88);
已经说了两种凡夫,其中应当知道,这里说的是盲凡夫。巴利
Dve puthujjanā vuttā, tesu andhaputhujjano vutto hotīti veditabbo.
在“不见圣者”等说法里,“圣者”是指:因为远离烦恼,所以是圣者;因为不走邪道,所以是圣者;因为走正道,所以是圣者;因为值得包括诸天在内的世间礼敬,所以是圣者——也就是诸佛、独觉佛和佛弟子。或者,这里说的“圣者”就只是指诸佛。正如经中所说:“比丘们,在包括诸天的世间……如来被称为圣者。”巴利
Ariyānaṃ adassāvītiādīsu ariyāti ārakattā kilesehi, anaye na iriyanato, aye iriyanato, sadevakena lokena ca araṇīyato buddhā ca paccekabuddhā ca buddhasāvakā ca vuccanti. Buddhā eva vā idha ariyā. Yathāha – ‘‘sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… tathāgato ariyoti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1098).
关于“善士”这个词,这里应当知道,独觉佛和如来弟子都是善士。因为他们具备出世间功德,所以是善美之人,因此称为善士。或者,所有这些都可以从两个方面来说。因为诸佛既是圣者也是善士,独觉佛和佛弟子也是如此。正如所说——巴利
Sappurisāti ettha pana paccekabuddhā tathāgatasāvakā ca sappurisāti veditabbā. Te hi lokuttaraguṇayogena sobhanā purisāti sappurisā. Sabbeva vā ete dvedhāpi vuttā. Buddhāpi hi ariyā ca sappurisā ca paccekabuddhā buddhasāvakāpi. Yathāha –
凡是真正知恩、懂得报恩的智者,
他既是善友,又具备坚定的忠诚。
对受苦的人,他认真去做该做的事,
人们称这样的人为善士。巴利
‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro, Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hoti; Dukhitassa sakkacca karoti kiccaṃ, Tathāvidhaṃ sappurisaṃ vadantī’’ti. (jā. 2.17.78);
“是善友,并且具备坚固的忠诚”——仅凭这一点,就可以说他是佛陀的弟子。以知恩等品质来说,则是独觉佛和佛。现在要知道:凡是对于诸圣者没有见到的习性,而且不善于见的人,就应当理解为“不见圣者”。这有两种:以眼不见和以智不见。其中,这里指的是以智不见。因为用肉眼或天眼看见圣者,即使看见了也如同没看见,因为那些眼只取色相,并不以圣者的性质为对象。狗和豺狼等也用眼睛看见圣者,但它们并不是看见圣者的人。巴利
‘Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotī’ti ettāvatā hi buddhasāvako vutto. Kataññutādīhi paccekabuddhā buddhāti. Idāni yo tesaṃ ariyānaṃ adassanasīlo, na ca dassane sādhukārī, so ariyānaṃ adassāvīti veditabbo. So cakkhunā adassāvī ñāṇena adassāvīti duvidho. Tesu ñāṇena adassāvī idha adhippeto. Maṃsacakkhunā hi dibbacakkhunā vā ariyā diṭṭhāpi adiṭṭhāva honti, tesaṃ cakkhūnaṃ vaṇṇamattaggahaṇato, na ariyabhāvagocarato. Soṇasiṅgālādayopi cakkhunā ariye passanti, na ca te ariyānaṃ dassāvino.
关于这件事,有一个故事:据说住在心山的一位漏尽长老,他的侍者是一个年纪很大才出家的人。有一天,他和长老一起去托钵,接过长老的钵和袈裟,跟在后面走,问长老说:“尊者,圣者到底是什么样的?”长老回答说:“比如这里有个上了年纪的人,拿着圣者的钵和袈裟,该做的义务和规矩都做了,甚至和圣者一起同行,却还是不认识圣者。贤友,圣者就是这样难以了知。”虽然长老这么说了,他还是没明白。所以,用眼睛看到的并不算“见”,只有智见才是“见”。正如经中所说:“婆迦梨,你看见这具腐臭的身体有什么用?婆迦梨,见到法的人,就是见到我。”(相应部3.87)因此,即使是用眼睛看见了,如果没有以智慧见到圣者们所见的无常等相,没有证得圣者们所证得的法,因为不见能成就圣者的法和圣者之所以为圣者的本质,就应当知道他是“不见圣者”的人。巴利
Tatridaṃ vatthu – cittalapabbatavāsino kira khīṇāsavattherassa upaṭṭhāko vuḍḍhapabbajito ekadivasaṃ therena saddhiṃ piṇḍāya caritvā therassa pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā piṭṭhito āgacchanto theraṃ pucchi – ‘ariyā nāma bhante kīdisā’ti? Thero āha – ‘idhekacco mahallako ariyānaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vattapaṭipattiṃ katvā saha carantopi neva ariye jānāti, evaṃdujjānāvuso, ariyā’ti. Evaṃ vuttepi so neva aññāsi. Tasmā na cakkhunā dassanaṃ ‘dassanaṃ’, ñāṇadassanameva ‘dassanaṃ’. Yathāha – ‘‘kiṃ te vakkali iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena? Yo kho, vakkali, dhammaṃ passati, so maṃ passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.87). Tasmā cakkhunā passantopi, ñāṇena ariyehi diṭṭhaṃ aniccādilakkhaṇaṃ apassanto, ariyādhigatañca dhammaṃ anadhigacchanto, ariyakaradhammānaṃ ariyabhāvassa ca adiṭṭhattā, ‘ariyānaṃ adassāvī’ti veditabbo.
对圣法不精通,就是对念处等各种圣法不精通。对圣法没有调伏,在这里巴利
Ariyadhammassaakovidoti satipaṭṭhānādibhede ariyadhamme akusalo. Ariyadhamme avinītoti, ettha pana
律有两种,其中每一种各有五种。
因为没有它,所以这被称为未调伏。巴利
Duvidho vinayo nāma, ekamekettha pañcadhā; Abhāvato tassa ayaṃ, avinītoti vuccati.
这个律有两种:防护律和断除律。在这里,两种律当中,每一种律又分成五种。防护律确实有五种:戒防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护。断除律也有五种:彼分断、镇伏断、正断断、安息断、出离断。巴利
Ayañhi saṃvaravinayo pahānavinayoti duvidho vinayo. Ettha ca duvidhepi vinaye ekameko vinayo pañcadhā bhijjati. Saṃvaravinayopi hi sīlasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti pañcavidho. Pahānavinayopi tadaṅgapahānaṃ vikkhambhanapahānaṃ samucchedapahānaṃ paṭippassaddhipahānaṃ nissaraṇapahānanti pañcavidho.
在这里,以此巴帝摩卡防护而具足、圆满具足,这就是戒防护。守护眼根,在眼根上做到防护,这就是念防护。巴利
Tattha ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto’’ti (vibha. 511) ayaṃ sīlasaṃvaro. ‘‘Rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.213; ma. ni. 1.295; saṃ. ni. 4.239; a. ni. 3.16) ayaṃ satisaṃvaro.
世间有哪些流,阿耆多啊,世尊说。
正念能阻止它们。
我说,守护诸根。
这些被智慧关闭了。巴利
‘‘Yāni sotāni lokasmiṃ, (ajitāti bhagavā) Sati tesaṃ nivāraṇaṃ; Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, Paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti. (su. ni. 1041) –
这称为智防护。能忍受寒冷和炎热,这是忍防护。已生起的欲寻不容忍,这是精进防护。而这一切防护,因为能各自防护应当防护的、调伏应当调伏的身恶行等,所以称为防护;因为能调伏,所以称为律。如此,应当知道防护律分为五种。巴利
Ayaṃ ñāṇasaṃvaro nāma. ‘‘Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.24; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) ayaṃ khantisaṃvaro. ‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.114; 6.58) ayaṃ vīriyasaṃvaro. Sabbopi cāyaṃ saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ vinetabbānañca kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇato saṃvaro, vinayanato vinayoti vuccati. Evaṃ tāva ‘saṃvaravinayo’ pañcadhā bhijjatīti veditabbo.
同样地,在名色分别等观智中,由于它们是对治法的缘故,就像灯光对治黑暗一样,通过每一种观智断除每一种过患,具体来说:通过名色确定断除有身见,通过缘摄受断除无因见和邪因见,通过后一阶段的度疑断除犹豫不决,通过聚观断除“我、我所”的执取,通过道非道确定断除对非道的道想,通过生随观断除断见,通过灭随观断除常见,通过怖畏随观断除对可怖事物的无畏想,通过过患随观断除乐想,通过厌离随观断除喜乐想,通过欲解脱智断除不欲解脱的状态,通过舍智断除不舍的状态,通过随顺智断除对法住和涅槃的违逆状态,通过种姓智断除对诸行相的执取——这称为“彼分断”。巴利
Tathā yaṃ nāmarūpaparicchedādīsu vipassanāñāṇesu paṭipakkhabhāvato, dīpālokeneva tamassa, tena tena vipassanāñāṇena tassa tassa anatthassa pahānaṃ, seyyathidaṃ – nāmarūpavavatthānena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā, paccayapariggahena ahetuvisamahetudiṭṭhīnaṃ, tasseva aparabhāgena kaṅkhāvitaraṇena kathaṃkathibhāvassa, kalāpasammasanena ‘ahaṃ mamā’ti gāhassa, maggāmaggavavatthānena amagge maggasaññāya, udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā, vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā, bhayadassanena sabhaye abhayasaññāya, ādīnavadassanena assādasaññāya, nibbidānupassanāya abhiratisaññāya, muccitukamyatāñāṇena amuccitukāmatāya, upekkhāñāṇena anupekkhāya, anulomena dhammaṭṭhitiyaṃ nibbāne ca paṭilomabhāvassa, gotrabhunā saṅkhāranimittaggāhassa pahānaṃ, etaṃ ‘tadaṅgapahānaṃ’ nāma.
通过近行定和安止定的区别,以定力阻止烦恼的现行,就像用瓶子打水面上的青苔一样,断除那些盖等法,这叫作“镇伏断”。依照“由修习四种圣道,各个道者在自己相续中为了断除诸邪见”等(《法集论》277)这样的方式所说的、属于集谛一方的烦恼群,以毕竟不再生起的方式断除,这叫作“正断断”。而在果位刹那烦恼的止息,这叫作“止息断”。由于出离一切有为法而成为已断除一切有为法的涅槃,这叫作“出离断”。这全部的断,因为以舍离为义而断,以调伏为义而成为律,所以称为“断律”。或者,因为具有各种断,所以各种调伏得以成立,因此也称为“断律”。应当知道,断律也有五种。巴利
Yaṃ pana upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattibhāvanivāraṇato, ghaṭappahāreneva udakapiṭṭhe sevālassa, tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇādidhammānaṃ pahānaṃ, etaṃ ‘vikkhambhanapahānaṃ’ nāma. ‘‘Yaṃ catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato attano attano santāne diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 277) nayena vuttassa samudayapakkhikassa kilesagaṇassa accantaṃ appavattibhāvena pahānaṃ, idaṃ ‘samucchedapahānaṃ’ nāma. Yaṃ pana phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddhattaṃ kilesānaṃ, etaṃ ‘paṭippassaddhipahānaṃ’ nāma. Yaṃ sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭattā pahīnasabbasaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ, etaṃ ‘nissaraṇapahānaṃ’ nāma. Sabbampi cetaṃ pahānaṃ yasmā cāgaṭṭhena pahānaṃ, vinayanaṭṭhena vinayo, tasmā ‘pahānavinayo’ti vuccati. Taṃtaṃpahānavato vā tassa tassa vinayassa sambhavatopetaṃ pahānavinayoti vuccati. Evaṃ pahānavinayopi pañcadhā bhijjatīti veditabbo.
这样,这个律简要来说有两种,详细分别则有十种。因为防护已经败坏,应当断除的又没有断除,所以这个律在未听闻佛法的凡夫身上不存在;正由于它不存在,就说这个人是“未调伏者”。同样的道理也适用于“不见善士、不晓得善士法、在善士法上没有受过调伏”这些说法。这在意义上其实没有差别。正如经中所说:“那些圣者就是善士,那些善士就是圣者。圣者的法就是善士的法,善士的法就是圣者的法。圣者的律就是善士的律,善士的律就是圣者的律。无论说圣者还是说善士,无论说圣法还是说善士法,无论说圣律还是说善士律,这些都是同一、同义、相等、相同、同类的,就是那一回事。”巴利
Evamayaṃ saṅkhepato duvidho, bhedato ca dasavidho vinayo, bhinnasaṃvarattā, pahātabbassa ca appahīnattā, yasmā etassa assutavato puthujjanassa natthi, tasmā abhāvato tassa, ayaṃ ‘avinīto’ti vuccatīti. Esa nayo sappurisānaṃ adassāvī sappurisadhammassa akovido sappurisadhamme avinītoti etthāpi. Ninnānākaraṇañhetaṃ atthato. Yathāha – ‘‘yeva te ariyā teva te sappurisā, yeva te sappurisā teva te ariyā. Yo eva so ariyānaṃ dhammo so eva so sappurisānaṃ dhammo, yo eva so sappurisānaṃ dhammo so eva so ariyānaṃ dhammo. Yeva te ariyavinayā teva te sappurisavinayā, yeva te sappurisavinayā teva te ariyavinayā. Ariyeti vā sappuriseti vā, ariyadhammeti vā sappurisadhammeti vā, ariyavinayeti vā sappurisavinayeti vā, esese eke ekaṭṭhe same samabhāge tajjāte taññevā’’ti.
有人把色看作我,这里说的就是:某些人把色当成我,认为“这个色就是我,我就是这个色”,把色和我看成没有分别的一体。就像一盏燃烧的油灯,火焰就是光色,光色就是火焰,把火焰和光色看成没有分别的一体;同样地,某些人把色看作我,就是这样以见解去看“色是我”。或者认为“我有色”:先执取“无色是我”,然后像树有影子一样,把那个我看作拥有色。或者认为“色在我中”:先执取“无色才是我”,然后像花中有香气一样,把色看作在我之中。或者认为“我在色中”:先执取“无色才是我”,然后像盒子里放着宝珠一样,把我看作在色之中。对受、想、行、识,也是同样的道理。巴利
Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatīti idhekacco rūpaṃ attato samanupassati – ‘yaṃ rūpaṃ so ahaṃ, yo ahaṃ taṃ rūpa’nti rūpañca attānañca advayaṃ samanupassati. ‘‘Seyyathāpi nāma telappadīpassa jhāyato yā acci so vaṇṇo, yo vaṇṇo sā accīti acciñca vaṇṇañca advayaṃ samanupassati,’’ evameva idhekacco rūpaṃ attato samanupassatīti evaṃ rūpaṃ attāti diṭṭhipassanāya passati. Rūpavantaṃ vā attānanti ‘arūpaṃ attā’ti gahetvā, chāyāvantaṃ rukkhaṃ viya, taṃ rūpavantaṃ samanupassati. Attani vā rūpanti ‘arūpameva attā’ti gahetvā, pupphamhi gandhaṃ viya, attani rūpaṃ samanupassati. Rūpasmiṃvā attānanti ‘arūpameva attā’ti gahetvā, karaṇḍake maṇiṃ viya, attānaṃ rūpasmiṃ samanupassati. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.
在这里,“观色是我”,说的是把纯粹的色当作我。“我有色,或色在我中,或我在色中;观受是我……观想……观行……观识是我”,在这七处,说的是“无色是我”。像“我有受,或受在我中,或我在受中”这样,在受、想、行、识四蕴中,每一蕴各有三种,共十二处,说的是“色与非色混合的我”。其中,“观色是我,观受……观想……观行……观识是我”,在这五处,说的是断灭见。其余各处,说的是常见。这样,这里就有十五种有见、五种无有见。应当知道,这些全都是道的障碍,不是天界的障碍,是初道所断的。巴利
Tattha ‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’ti suddharūpameva attāti kathitaṃ. ‘Rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā rūpaṃ, rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ; vedanaṃ attato samanupassati… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’ti imesu sattasu ṭhānesu ‘arūpaṃ attā’ti kathitaṃ. Vedanāvantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā vedanaṃ, vedanāya vā attānanti evaṃ catūsu khandhesu tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vasena dvādasasu ṭhānesu ‘rūpārūpamissako attā’ kathito. Tattha ‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassati vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’ti imesu pañcasu ṭhānesu ucchedadiṭṭhi kathitā. Avasesesu sassatadiṭṭhi. Evamettha pannarasa bhavadiṭṭhiyo pañca vibhavadiṭṭhiyo honti. Tā sabbāpi maggāvaraṇā, na saggāvaraṇā, paṭhamamaggavajjhāti veditabbā.
1008 对导师有疑惑,就是对导师的身体、或导师的功德、或对这两者都有疑惑。对导师的身体有疑惑时,他心里想:“具足三十二种殊胜相好的身体,到底是有还是没有?”对导师的功德有疑惑时,他心里想:“能了知过去、未来、现在一切的全知智,到底是有还是没有?”对这两者都有疑惑时,他心里想:“具足八十种随形好、身光一丈之身体成就,已证得能了知一切所知的全知智而安住的世间导师,名为佛陀,到底是有还是没有?”这个人因为对导师的身体或功德有疑惑,所以就说他对两者都有疑惑。“犹豫”是指对所缘对象无法做出决断,心里困顿、疲惫。“不信解”是指就在那上面得不到胜解。“不净信”是指不能让心清净而生起净信,对功德无法生起净信。巴利
1008.Satthari kaṅkhatīti satthu sarīre vā guṇe vā ubhayattha vā kaṅkhati. Sarīre kaṅkhamāno ‘dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nāma sarīraṃ atthi nu kho natthī’ti kaṅkhati. Guṇe kaṅkhamāno ‘atītānāgatapaccuppannajānanasamatthaṃ sabbaññutañāṇaṃ atthi nu kho natthī’ti kaṅkhati. Ubhayattha kaṅkhamāno ‘asītianubyañjanabyāmappabhānurañjitāya sarīranipphattiyā samannāgato sabbañeyyajānanasamatthaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhitvā ṭhito lokatārako buddho nāma atthi nu kho natthī’ti kaṅkhati. Ayañhissa attabhāve guṇe vā kaṅkhanato ubhayattha kaṅkhati nāma. Vicikicchatīti ārammaṇaṃ nicchetuṃ asakkonto kicchati kilamati. Nādhimuccatīti tattheva adhimokkhaṃ na labhati. Na sampasīdatīti cittaṃ anāvilaṃ katvā pasīdituṃ na sakkoti, guṇesu nappasīdati.
在“对法有疑惑”等当中,如果疑惑:“断除烦恼的四圣道、烦恼已止息的四沙门果、作为道与果所缘缘的不死大涅槃,到底存在还是不存在?”或者疑惑:“这个法到底是能导向解脱,还是不能导向解脱?”这就叫对法有疑惑。如果疑惑:“四位住于道者、四位住于果者,这个僧宝到底存在还是不存在?”或者疑惑:“这个僧团是修行端正,还是修行不正?”或者疑惑:“对这个僧宝作布施,它的异熟果到底存在还是不存在?”这就叫对僧有疑惑。如果疑惑:“三学到底存在还是不存在?”或者疑惑:“修习三学所带来的利益到底存在还是不存在?”这就叫对学有疑惑。巴利
Dhamme kaṅkhatītiādīsu pana ‘kilese pajahantā cattāro ariyamaggā, paṭippassaddhakilesāni cattāri sāmaññaphalāni, maggaphalānaṃ ārammaṇapaccayabhūtaṃ amataṃ mahānibbānaṃ nāma atthi nu kho natthī’ti kaṅkhantopi ‘ayaṃ dhammo niyyāniko nu kho aniyyāniko’ti kaṅkhantopi dhamme kaṅkhati nāma. ‘Cattāro maggaṭṭhakā cattāro phalaṭṭhakāti idaṃ saṅgharatanaṃ atthi nu kho natthī’ti kaṅkhantopi, ‘ayaṃ saṅgho suppaṭipanno nu kho duppaṭipanno’ti kaṅkhantopi, ‘etasmiṃ saṅgharatane dinnassa vipākaphalaṃ atthi nu kho natthī’ti kaṅkhantopi saṅghe kaṅkhati nāma. ‘Tisso pana sikkhā atthi nu kho natthī’ti kaṅkhantopi, ‘tisso sikkhā sikkhitapaccayena ānisaṃso atthi nu kho natthī’ti kaṅkhantopi sikkhāya kaṅkhati nāma.
“前际”指的是过去的蕴、界、处。“后际”指的是未来的。在这里,对过去的蕴等心生疑惑:“是过去的呢,还是不是过去的呢?”这叫做对前际疑惑。对未来的心生疑惑:“是未来的呢,还是不是未来的呢?”这叫做对后际疑惑。对两者都疑惑,就叫做对前后际疑惑。如果疑惑:“十二支的缘起轮转,是存在还是不存在?”这叫做对缘起法疑惑。这里的词义是这样:这些老死等的缘,叫做“此缘”;此缘的状态,叫做“此缘性”;或者“此缘”本身就是“此缘性”,这是对生等的另一种称呼。依于生等各自的缘而生起,所以叫做“缘起”。这段话的意思是:对此缘性和缘起法疑惑。巴利
Pubbanto vuccati atītāni khandhadhātāyatanāni. Aparanto anāgatāni. Tattha atītesu khandhādīsu ‘atītāni nu kho, na nu kho’ti kaṅkhanto pubbante kaṅkhati nāma. Anāgatesu ‘anāgatāni nu kho, na nu kho’ti kaṅkhanto aparante kaṅkhati nāma. Ubhayattha kaṅkhanto pubbantāparante kaṅkhati nāma. ‘Dvādasapadikaṃ paccayavaṭṭaṃ atthi nu kho natthī’ti kaṅkhanto idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu kaṅkhati nāma. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – imesaṃ jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayā ‘idappaccayā’. Idappaccayānaṃ bhāvo ‘idappaccayatā’. Idappaccayā eva vā ‘idappaccayatā’; jātiādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Jātiādīsu taṃ taṃ paṭicca āgamma samuppannāti ‘paṭiccasamuppannā’. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – idappaccayatāya ca paṭiccasamuppannesu ca dhammesu kaṅkhatīti.
1009 “以戒”,是指牛戒等;“以禁行”,是指牛禁行等;“以戒禁”,是指这两者。“清净”,是指烦恼的清净,或者就是指作为胜义清净的涅槃本身。“同处”,在这里指断除上的同一处。在这段经文里,只出现了见烦恼和疑烦恼这两种。贪、嗔、痴、慢、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这八种则没有出现,但应当引出来加以说明。因为在这里,当见和疑被断除时,能令人堕入恶趣的贪、嗔、痴、慢、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧,这一切都成为断除上的同一处而被断除。不过,还应当引出俱生同处来加以说明。因为以入流道,四种与见相应的心和一种与疑相应的心,共五种心被断除。其中,当两种与见相应的无行心被断除时,与它们俱生的贪、痴、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,以俱生同处之力被断除;其余的见烦恼和疑烦恼,则以断除同处之力被断除。当与见相应的有行心被断除时,与它们俱生的贪、痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼,以俱生同处之力被断除;其余的见烦恼和疑烦恼,则以断除同处之力被断除。这样,在断除同处之中就得到了俱生同处,这就是他们引出俱生同处来加以说明的意思。巴利
1009.Sīlenāti gosīlādinā. Vatenāti govatādināva. Sīlabbatenāti tadubhayena. Suddhīti kilesasuddhi; paramatthasuddhibhūtaṃ vā nibbānameva. Tadekaṭṭhāti idha pahānekaṭṭhaṃ dhuraṃ. Imissā ca pāḷiyā diṭṭhikileso vicikicchākilesoti dveyeva āgatā. Lobho doso moho māno thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime pana aṭṭha anāgatā. Āharitvā pana dīpetabbā. Ettha hi diṭṭhivicikicchāsu pahīyamānāsu apāyagamanīyo lobho doso moho māno thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti sabbepime pahānekaṭṭhā hutvā pahīyanti. Sahajekaṭṭhaṃ pana āharitvā dīpetabbaṃ. Sotāpattimaggena hi cattāri diṭṭhisahagatāni vicikicchāsahagatañcāti pañca cittāni pahīyanti. Tattha dvīsu asaṅkhārikadiṭṭhicittesu pahīyantesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Sesadiṭṭhikileso ca vicikicchākileso ca pahānekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Diṭṭhigatasampayuttasasaṅkhārikacittesupi pahīyantesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Sesadiṭṭhikileso ca vicikicchākileso ca pahānekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Evaṃ pahānekaṭṭhasmiṃyeva sahajekaṭṭhaṃ labbhatīti idaṃ sahajekaṭṭhaṃ āharitvā dīpayiṃsu.
与那些相应,就是与那些同处的八种烦恼相应。或者分开来说:与这个贪、与这个嗔等等,应当这样说明逐一相应的情况。其中,如果取贪,那么痴、慢、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧,这一群属于行蕴的烦恼,就叫作与贪相应。如果取嗔,那么痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧,这一群烦恼就叫作与嗔相应。如果取痴,那么贪、嗔、慢、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧,这一群烦恼就叫作与痴相应。如果取慢,那么与它一起生起的贪、痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧,这一群烦恼就叫作与慢相应。用这个方法,应当这样连接:与这个昏沉、与这个掉举、与这个无惭、与这个无愧相应,所以叫“与彼相应”。由彼所生,意思就是由这个贪……乃至由这个无愧所生起。巴利
Taṃsampayuttoti tehi tadekaṭṭhehi aṭṭhahi kilesehi sampayutto. Vinibbhogaṃ vā katvā tena lobhena tena dosenāti evaṃ ekekena sampayuttatā dīpetabbā. Tattha lobhe gahite, moho māno thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ayaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhe kilesagaṇo lobhasampayutto nāma. Dose gahite, moho thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ayaṃ kilesagaṇo dosasampayutto nāma. Mohe gahite, lobho doso māno thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ayaṃ kilesagaṇo mohasampayutto nāma. Māne gahite, tena sahuppanno lobho moho thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ayaṃ kilesagaṇo mānasampayutto nāma. Iminā upāyena tena thinena tena uddhaccena tena ahirikena tena anottappena sampayutto taṃsampayuttoti yojanā kātabbā. Taṃsamuṭṭhānanti tena lobhena…pe… tena anottappena samuṭṭhitanti attho.
在这里,“这些法应当以见断除”中的“见”,指的是入流道;意思是应当以入流道来断除。那为什么入流道被称为“见”呢?因为它是第一个见到涅槃的。那么,种姓心不是更早见到吗?不是没见到,它虽然见到了,但还没有完成应当完成的事,因为没有断除结缚。所以不能说它“见”。就像有个乡下人,虽然在某处见到了国王,但因为还没有献上礼物、还没有办成事情,就说“我到现在还没见到国王”,这里可以拿这个人作例子。巴利
Ime dhammā dassanena pahātabbāti ettha dassanaṃ nāma sotāpattimaggo; tena pahātabbāti attho. ‘Kasmā pana sotāpattimaggo dassanaṃ nāma jāto’ti? ‘Paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato’. ‘Nanu gotrabhu paṭhamataraṃ passatī’ti ? ‘No na passati; disvāpi kattabbakiccaṃ pana na karoti, saṃyojanānaṃ appahānato. Tasmā passatī’ti na vattabbo. Yattha katthaci rājānaṃ disvāpi paṇṇākāraṃ datvā kiccanipphattiyā adiṭṭhattā ‘ajjāpi rājānaṃ na passāmī’ti vadanto cettha jānapadapuriso nidassanaṃ.
1011 “其余的贪”是指通过见道所断之后残余下来的贪。嗔和痴也一样,应当以同样的方式理解。因为见道所断除的,只是那些能导致投生恶趣的烦恼。为了指出除此之外还有其他烦恼,才说了这句话。“同处”是指:与经中提到的这三种烦恼,在相应上和在被断除上,都同属一处的五种烦恼。“既非以见道所断,也非以修道所断”这句话,是针对它们不像结缚等那样会被那些道所断除而说的。然而,像“以入流道智,由行识的灭尽,除了七有之外,在无始轮回中可能生起的名色,就在这里灭尽”这样的说法,也承认善法等可以被断除。应当知道,这是依据这样的理趣而说的:由于那些道尚未修习,所以那些可能生起的善法等,因为作为它们亲依止缘的烦恼已被断除,所以说它们已被断除。巴利
1011.Avaseso lobhoti dassanena pahīnāvaseso. Lobho dosamohesupi eseva nayo. Dassanena hi apāyagamanīyāva pahīnā. Tehi pana aññe dassetuṃ idaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘Tadekaṭṭhā’ti tehi pāḷiyaṃ āgatehi tīhi kilesehi sampayogatopi pahānatopi ekaṭṭhā pañca kilesā. Neva dassanena na bhāvanāyāti idaṃ saṃyojanādīnaṃ viya tehi maggehi appahātabbataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ pana ‘‘sotāpattimaggañāṇena abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa nirodhena satta bhave ṭhapetvā anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe ye uppajjeyyuṃ, nāmañca rūpañca etthete nirujjhantī’’tiādinā nayena kusalādīnampi pahānaṃ anuññātaṃ, taṃ tesaṃ maggānaṃ abhāvitattā ye uppajjeyyuṃ, te upanissayapaccayānaṃ kilesānaṃ pahīnattā pahīnāti imaṃ pariyāyaṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
1013 在“见所断因”这一三法聚中,先确定“这些法是见所断因”,然后再指出“三结”等应当断除的内容,接着为了说明与它们同处的因以及有因,才说了这句话。其中,在见所断的因里,与贪俱起的痴以贪为因,所以是有因;与嗔俱起的痴以嗔为因,所以是有因;贪和嗔也以痴为因,所以是有因——这些都已经包含在“所断因”这一项里了。但是,与疑俱起的痴,因为没有其他与之相应的因,它只是因,而不是有因。为了说明它的断除,才说“这些法是见所断因”。巴利
1013.Dassanenapahātabbahetukattike ime dhammā dassanena pahātabbahetukāti niṭṭhapetvā, puna ‘tīṇi saṃyojanānī’tiādi pahātabbe dassetvā, tadekaṭṭhabhāvena hetū ceva sahetuke ca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘kiñcāpi dassanena pahātabbesu hetūsu lobhasahagato moho lobhena sahetuko hoti, dosasahagato moho dosena, lobhadosā ca mohenāti pahātabbahetukapadepete saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, vicikicchāsahagato pana moho aññassa sampayuttahetuno abhāvena hetuyeva, na sahetukoti tassa pahānaṃ dassetuṃ ime dhammā dassanena pahātabbahetū’ti vuttaṃ.
1018 在第二句中,为了说明与掉举俱起的痴应当被断除,所以说“这些法是修所断因”。因为这种痴虽然让与它相应的诸法成为有因,它自己却落到了后面,就像与疑俱起的痴一样,由于没有其他相应的因,所以不属于“所断因”这一类。第三句中再次提到“其余不善”,是为了把与疑和掉举俱起的痴也收摄进来。因为它们没有相应的因,所以不叫“所断因”。巴利
1018. Dutiyapade uddhaccasahagatassa mohassa pahānaṃ dassetuṃ ime dhammā bhāvanāya pahātabbahetūti vuttaṃ. So hi attanā sampayuttadhamme sahetuke katvā piṭṭhivaṭṭako jāto, vicikicchāsahagato viya aññassa sampayuttahetuno abhāvā pahātabbahetukapadaṃ na bhajati. Tatiyapade avasesā akusalāti puna akusalaggahaṇaṃ vicikicchuddhaccasahagatānaṃ mohānaṃ saṅgahatthaṃ kataṃ. Te hi sampayuttahetuno abhāvā pahātabbahetukā nāma na honti.
1029 在“小所缘三法”中,“ārabbha”的意思是“以……为所缘”。因为,不论它们本身是小还是大,缘取小法而生起的,就是“小所缘”;缘取大法而生起的,就是“大所缘”;缘取无量法而生起的,就是“无量所缘”。不过,它们本身也可以是小、是大、也可以是无量。巴利
1029. Parittārammaṇattike ārabbhāti ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Sayañhi parittā vā hontu mahaggatā vā, parittadhamme ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppannā parittārammaṇā, mahaggate ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppannā mahaggatārammaṇā, appamāṇe ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppannā appamāṇārammaṇā. Te pana parittāpi honti mahaggatāpi appamāṇāpi.
1035 1035. 在“邪性三法”中,“无间”是指毫无间隔地直接产生果报;这是对杀母等业的称呼。因为在这些业当中,只要造下了其中一种,它就会挡住其他业,让其他业没有机会成熟自己的果报。就算有人建了一座像须弥山那么大的金塔,又建了一座以整个轮围界为范围的宝石墙精舍,把里面填满,然后终生向以佛陀为首的僧团供养四种资具,那样的善业也还是挡不住这些业的果报。而“定邪见”,是指无因论、无作用论、虚无论当中的任何一种。因为一个人一旦执取这种邪见并安住其中,哪怕有一百尊佛、一千尊佛,也没办法让他觉悟。巴利
1035. Micchattattike ānantarikānīti anantarāyena phaladāyakāni; mātughātakakammādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tesu hi ekasmimpi kamme kate taṃ paṭibāhitvā aññaṃ kammaṃ attano vipākassa okāsaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Sineruppamāṇepi hi suvaṇṇathūpe katvā cakkavāḷamattaṃ vā ratanamayapākāraṃ vihāraṃ kāretvā taṃ pūretvā nisinnassa buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa yāvajīvaṃ cattāro paccaye dadatopi taṃ kammaṃ etesaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ paṭibāhetuṃ na sakkoti eva. Yā ca micchādiṭṭhi niyatāti ahetukavādaakiriyavādanatthikavādesu aññatarā. Tañhi gahetvā ṭhitaṃ puggalaṃ buddhasatampi buddhasahassampi bodhetuṃ na sakkoti.
1038 在“道所缘三法”中,“以圣道为所缘”是指以出世间道作为所缘。不过,它们也可以是小法或大法。巴利
1038. Maggārammaṇattike ariyamaggaṃ ārabbhāti lokuttaramaggaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Te pana parittāpi honti mahaggatāpi.
1039 在“道因”的解释里,应当知道:第一种理路是以“缘”的意义上的“因”,说明与道相应的诸蕴是有因的。第二种理路是说明,以作为道的正见这个“因”,其余道支是有因的。第三种理路是说明,以在道中生起的诸因,正见是有因的。巴利
1039. Maggahetukaniddese paṭhamanayena paccayaṭṭhena hetunā maggasampayuttānaṃ khandhānaṃ sahetukabhāvo dassito. Dutiyanayena maggabhūtena sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātena hetunā sesamaggaṅgānaṃ sahetukabhāvo dassito. Tatiyanayena magge uppannahetūhi sammādiṭṭhiyā sahetukabhāvo dassitoti veditabbo.
1040 “以增上而作”是指以所缘为增上而作。不过,这些法只是有限的小法。因为圣弟子在把自己所证的道当作尊贵之物来回顾时,所缘增上才得以现起。然而,圣弟子以他心智回顾他人的道时,即使心存尊重,也不会像对自己所证悟的道那样尊重。有人问:看见如来示现双神变时,会不会尊重他的道?答案是:会尊重,但不像对自己道那样。阿罗汉除了道、果、涅槃之外,不把任何法当作尊贵之物。这里也是同样的意思。“以慧为增上”这句,是为了说明俱生增上。因为,以欲为主导而修习道的人,欲才叫增上,道不是增上;其余诸法也只是称为欲的增上,而不是道的增上。心也是如此。然而,以慧为主导而修习道的人,慧既是增上,道也是增上;其余诸法则称为道的增上。精进也是这样。巴利
1040.Adhipatiṃ karitvāti ārammaṇādhipatiṃ katvā. Te ca kho parittadhammāva honti. Ariyasāvakānañhi attano maggaṃ garuṃ katvā paccavekkhaṇakāle ārammaṇādhipati labbhati. Cetopariyañāṇena pana ariyasāvako parassa maggaṃ paccavekkhamāno garuṃ karontopi attanā paṭividdhamaggaṃ viya garuṃ na karoti. ‘Yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ karontaṃ tathāgataṃ disvā tassa maggaṃ garuṃ karoti na karotī’ti? Karoti, na pana attano maggaṃ viya. Arahā na kiñci dhammaṃ garuṃ karoti ṭhapetvā maggaṃ phalaṃ nibbānanti. Etthāpi ayamevattho. Vīmaṃsādhipateyyanti idaṃ sahajātādhipatiṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Chandañhi jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā maggaṃ bhāventassa chando adhipati nāma hoti, na maggo. Sesadhammāpi chandādhipatino nāma honti, na maggādhipatino. Cittepi eseva nayo. Vīmaṃsaṃ pana jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā maggaṃ bhāventassa vīmaṃsādhipati ceva hoti maggo cāti. Sesadhammā maggādhipatino nāma honti. Vīriyepi eseva nayo.
1041 在“已生三法”的解释中,“已生”指已经产生、已经获得自体。“已成”等词只是它的同义词。已生本身就是因为达到存在状态而成为“已成”;因为因缘结合而生起,所以叫“已共生”;因为达到了产生的特相,所以叫“已产生”;再加上前缀扩展词义,就说为“已极产生”;已经明显存在,所以叫“已显现”;从过去的一端向上超出,所以叫“已起”;再加上前缀扩展词义,就说为“已等起”;就在产生的状态上向上安立,所以叫“已立”;因为因缘结合而向上安立,所以叫“已等立”。再者,对于“已起”这一重复表述,其理由应依下文所说之方式理解。以“已起”这一部分所摄,即已入于已起部分的计数。色、受、想、行、识,这是对它们的自性的显示。第二句的解释应依所说的遮遣方式理解。第三句的解释则是浅显易懂的。巴利
1041. Uppannattikaniddese jātāti nibbattā, paṭiladdhattabhāvā. Bhūtātiādīni tesaṃyeva vevacanāni. Jātā eva hi bhāvappattiyā bhūtā. Paccayasaṃyoge jātattā sañjātā. Nibbattilakkhaṇappattattā nibbattā. Upasaggena pana padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā abhinibbattāti vuttā. Pākaṭībhūtāti pātubhūtā. Pubbantato uddhaṃ pannāti uppannā. Upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā samuppannāti vuttā. Nibbattaṭṭheneva uddhaṃ ṭhitāti uṭṭhitā. Paccayasaṃyoge uṭṭhitāti samuṭṭhitā. Puna uppannātivacane kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Uppannaṃsena saṅgahitāti uppannakoṭṭhāsena gaṇanaṃ gatā. Rūpaṃ vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇanti idaṃ nesaṃ sabhāvadassanaṃ. Dutiyapadaniddeso vuttapaṭisedhanayena veditabbo. Tatiyapadaniddeso uttānatthoyeva.
这个三法组合,是依据两种时间距离来说明的。因为已经获得机会的业,它的果报有两种:已经得到时机的,和还没得到时机的。其中,已经得到时机的,就叫作“已生”。还没得到时机的,无论是下一心识之后生起,还是经过百千劫之后才生起,从它作为决定缘的意义来说,都不能说它是“无有”,而应叫作“必定生起之法”。就像经中所说:“布吒婆楼,那个无色、由想所成的我确实仍然存在。然后,这个人的其他想生起,其他想灭去。”在这里,在无色界中,当欲界想活动时,虽然根本的有分想已经灭去,但当欲界想灭去时,它必定会生起,所以不落入“无有”的范畴,而说为“确实安住着”,这就被称为“确实安住”。同样地,已经获得机会的业,它的果报有两种……从它作为决定缘的意义来说,都不能说它是“无有”,而应叫作“必定生起之法”。巴利
Ayaṃ pana tiko dvinnaṃ addhānaṃ vasena pūretvā dassito. Laddhokāsassa hi kammassa vipāko duvidho – khaṇappatto, ca appatto ca. Tattha ‘khaṇappatto’ uppanno nāma. ‘Appatto’ cittānantare vā uppajjatu, kappasatasahassātikkame vā. Dhuvapaccayaṭṭhena natthi nāma na hoti, uppādino dhammā nāma jāto. Yathā hi – ‘‘tiṭṭhateva sāyaṃ, poṭṭhapāda, arūpī attā saññāmayo . Atha imassa purisassa aññā ca saññā uppajjanti aññā ca saññā nirujjhantī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.419). Ettha āruppe kāmāvacarasaññāpavattikāle kiñcāpi mūlabhavaṅgasaññā niruddhā kāmāvacarasaññāya pana niruddhakāle avassaṃ sā uppajjissatīti arūpasaṅkhāto attā natthīti saṅkhyaṃ agantvā ‘tiṭṭhateva’ nāmāti jāto. Evameva laddhokāsassa kammassa vipāko duvidho…pe… dhuvapaccayaṭṭhena natthi nāma na hoti, uppādino dhammā nāma jāto.
如果所造作的善业和不善业全都要给出果报,那就没有其他业果报的余地了。不过,业有两种:定果报的业和不定果报的业。其中,五种无间业、八种等至、四种圣道,这些叫做“定果报”。而定果报又分两种:已经得到时机的,和还没得到时机的。其中,“已经得到时机”叫已生起,“还没得到时机”叫未生起。它的果报可能在下一心识之后生起,也可能经过百千劫之后才生起。从决定缘的意义来说,不能叫它“未生起”,因为能生起之法就叫做已生。弥勒菩萨的道叫做“未生起”,而它的果则正是能生起之法,所以叫做已生。巴利
Yadi pana āyūhitaṃ kusalākusalakammaṃ sabbaṃ vipākaṃ dadeyya, aññassa okāso na bhaveyya. Taṃ pana duvidhaṃ hoti – dhuvavipākaṃ, adhuvavipākañca. Tattha pañca ānantariyakammāni, aṭṭha samāpattiyo, cattāro ariyamaggāti etaṃ ‘dhuvavipākaṃ’ nāma. Taṃ pana khaṇappattampi atthi, appattampi. Tattha ‘khaṇappattaṃ’ uppannaṃ nāma. ‘Appattaṃ’ anuppannaṃ nāma. Tassa vipāko cittānantare vā uppajjatu kappasatasahassātikkame vā. Dhuvapaccayaṭṭhena anuppannaṃ nāma na hoti, uppādino dhammā nāma jātaṃ. Metteyyabodhisattassa maggo anuppanno nāma, phalaṃ uppādino dhammāyeva nāma jātaṃ.
1044 在解说过去三法时,“过去”指已经超越三刹那。“已灭”指已经达到灭尽。“已离去”指已经走向坏灭,或者已经消散。“已变异”指因为舍弃了本性而发生了转变。“已经到达被称为灭尽的境地”就是“已归灭”。“已完全归灭”是把词加上前缀后扩展而成的说法。“生起之后离去”就是产生之后又消散了。这里再次说到“过去”这个词,理由和前面所说的一样。接下来讲“未来”等时,也是同样的方式。“被过去这一部分所包含”指被算入过去那一类。这些是哪些呢?就是色、受、想、行、识。接下来讲“未来”等时,也是同样的方式。巴利
1044. Atītattikaniddese atītāti khaṇattayaṃ atikkantā. Niruddhāti nirodhappattā. Vigatāti vibhavaṃ gatā, vigacchitā vā. Vipariṇatāti pakativijahanena vipariṇāmaṃ gatā. Nirodhasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ gatāti atthaṅgatā. Abbhatthaṅgatāti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Uppajjitvā vigatāti nibbattitvā vigacchitā. Puna atītavacane kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Parato anāgatādīsupi eseva nayo. Atītaṃsena saṅgahitāti atītakoṭṭhāsena gaṇanaṃ gatā. Katame teti? Rūpaṃ vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ. Parato anāgatādīsupi eseva nayo.
1047 在“过去所缘三法”的解说中,在“缘于过去诸法”等语句中,应当知道只是有限法与广大法。因为正是这些法缘于过去等而生起。巴利
1047. Atītārammaṇattikaniddese atīte dhamme ārabbhātiādīsu parittamahaggatāva dhammā veditabbā. Te hi atītādīni ārabbha uppajjanti.
1050 在“内三法”的解说中,用“那些、那些”这两个词就把一切众生都包括了。“内”和“个体”这两个词都是指自身内部。“确定”是指在自己当中生起的。“各个各别”是指属于每一个、每一个个人的。“所执取”是指住在身体当中的那些。因为这些法不管是不是业所生的,在这里都按照被执取、被把握、被执持的意义而称为“所执取”。巴利
1050. Ajjhattattikaniddese tesaṃ tesanti padadvayena sabbasatte pariyādiyati. Ajjhattaṃ paccattanti ubhayaṃ niyakajjhattādhivacanaṃ. Niyatāti attani jātā. Pāṭipuggalikāti pāṭiyekkassa pāṭiyekkassa puggalassa santakā. Upādiṇṇāti sarīraṭṭhakā. Te hi kammanibbattā vā hontu mā vā, ādinnagahitaparāmaṭṭhavasena pana idha upādiṇṇāti vuttā.
1051 “其他众生”是指除了自己以外的其余众生。“其他人”是同一个意思的另一种说法。剩下的内容和前面说过的差不多。“那两者”就是指那两个。巴利
1051.Parasattānanti attānaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttasadisameva. Tadubhayanti taṃ ubhayaṃ.
1053 在“内所缘三法”的第一项里,应当知道是有限法和广大法。第二项里也有无量法。第三项里只有有限法和广大法。不过,无量法有时以外法为所缘,有时以内法为所缘,并不如此。“有见三法”的解释则很清楚。巴利
1053. Ajjhattārammaṇattikassa paṭhamapade parittamahaggatā dhammā veditabbā. Dutiye appamāṇāpi. Tatiye parittamahaggatāva. Appamāṇā pana kālena bahiddhā kālena ajjhattaṃ ārammaṇaṃ na karonti. Sanidassanattikaniddeso uttānoyevāti.
1062 在“二法”中解释“无嗔”时,依慈爱的行相而说为慈。慈的形态就是慈爱。具有慈爱者之心的状态,就是慈心性。能怜悯,所以是怜悯;意思是保护。怜悯的形态就是怜悯的表现。具有怜悯者的状态,就是怜悯性。以寻求利益的行相而说为利益寻求。以同情关怀的行相而说为慈悯。用所有这些词所说的,都是已达到近行定和安止定的慈。其余的词则说明了世间的和出世间的无嗔。巴利
1062. Dukesu adosaniddese mettāyanavasena metti. Mettākāro mettāyanā. Mettāya ayitassa mettāsamaṅgino cittassa bhāvo mettāyitattaṃ. Anudayatīti anuddā, rakkhatīti attho. Anuddākāro anuddāyanā. Anuddāyitassa bhāvo anuddāyitattaṃ. Hitassa esanavasena hitesitā. Anukampanavasena anukampā. Sabbehipi imehi padehi upacārappanāppattā mettāva vuttā. Sesapadehi lokiyalokuttaro adoso kathito.
1063 在“无痴”的解释里,“于苦之智”就是指对苦圣谛的慧。“于苦之集”等也是这样理解。这里,“于苦之智”适用于听闻、思惟、通达、观察这四个层面。对苦之集也是如此。但对灭的智,只适用于听闻、通达、观察。对道也是这样。“前际”指过去的部分。“后际”指未来的部分。“前后际”指这两者。“于缘性、缘起诸法之智”是指:这是缘,这是缘所生之法,依此缘而此生起——如此,对诸缘以及缘所生诸法的智。巴利
1063. Amohaniddese dukkhe ñāṇanti dukkhasacce paññā. Dukkhasamudayetiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca dukkhe ñāṇaṃ savanasammasanapaṭivedhapaccavekkhaṇāsu vattati. Tathā dukkhasamudaye. Nirodhe pana savanapaṭivedhapaccavekkhaṇāsu eva. Tathā paṭipadāya. Pubbanteti atītakoṭṭhāse. Aparanteti anāgatakoṭṭhāse. Pubbantāparanteti tadubhaye. Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu ñāṇanti ayaṃ paccayo, idaṃ paccayuppannaṃ, idaṃ paṭicca idaṃ nibbattanti, evaṃ paccayesu ca paccayuppannadhammesu ca ñāṇaṃ.
1065 在解释“贪”的部分,下面这些还没讲到的词,意思是这样的:以染著为“贪”。以强力染著为“极贪”。因为牵引众生于各种境界,所以叫“牵引”。随顺,就是欲求的意思。众生依靠它在任何生存处欢喜,或者它自己欢喜,所以叫“欢喜”。这欢喜以染著来说也是贪,所以叫“欢喜贪”。其中,对同一个所缘只生起一次的渴爱叫“欢喜”;一再反复生起的叫“欢喜贪”。“心的极贪”是指:前面以强力染著所说的“极贪”,那不是众生的极贪,而是心的极贪。巴利
1065. Lobhaniddesepi heṭṭhā anāgatānaṃ padānaṃ ayamattho – rañjanavasena rāgo. Balavarañjanaṭṭhena sārāgo. Visayesu sattānaṃ anunayanato anunayo. Anurujjhatīti anurodho, kāmetīti attho. Yattha katthaci bhave sattā etāya nandanti, sayaṃ vā nandatīti nandī. Nandī ca sā rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo cāti nandīrāgo. Tattha ekasmiṃ ārammaṇe sakiṃ uppannā taṇhā ‘nandī’. Punappunaṃ uppajjamānā ‘nandīrāgo’ti vuccati. Cittassa sārāgoti yo heṭṭhā balavarañjanaṭṭhena sārāgoti vutto, so na sattassa, cittasseva sārāgoti attho.
众生以它来希求各种对象,所以叫“欲求”。因为烦恼极为厚重,众生被它弄得昏头转向,所以叫“昏迷”。像吞下去又彻底消化那样牢牢抓住,就是“执取”。众生以此贪求,陷入贪著,所以叫“贪”;或者也可以按“厚重”这个意思叫“贪”。所谓“贪得像密林一样”,这里正是按“厚重”的意思说的。紧挨着的那个词是加上前缀扩展而成的。或者从方方面面都贪,所以叫“遍贪”。众生以此粘着,所以叫“执著”;或者按“黏附”的意思叫“执著”。按“沉陷”的意思叫“泥沼”。按“拉扯”的意思叫“动摇”。经里说:“动摇把这个人拖来拖去,让他一再投生到各种生存状态中。”按“欺骗”的意思叫“幻”。在轮回中让众生生出来,所以叫“能生”。经里说:“渴爱生出人,他的心四处奔散。”在轮回中,它以苦把众生绑在一起,让他们生出来,所以叫“令生”。按“缝合”的意思叫“缝纫”。因为渴爱在轮回中,以死亡和结生的方式把众生缝起来、接起来,就像裁缝把布片和布片缝在一起一样,所以按“缝合”的意思叫“缝纫”。它有各种各样境界的网,或者有计为渴爱躁动依处之网,所以叫“有网”。巴利
Icchanti etāya ārammaṇānīti icchā. Bahalakilesabhāvena mucchanti etāya pāṇinoti mucchā. Gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gahaṇavasena ajjhosānaṃ. Iminā sattā gijjhanti, gedhaṃ āpajjantīti gedho; bahalaṭṭhena vā gedho. ‘‘Gedhaṃ vā pavanasaṇḍa’’nti hi bahalaṭṭheneva vuttaṃ. Anantarapadaṃ upasaggavasena vaḍḍhitaṃ. Sabbatobhāgena vā gedhoti paligedho. Sañjanti etenāti saṅgo; lagganaṭṭhena vā saṅgo. Osīdanaṭṭhena paṅko. Ākaḍḍhanavasena ejā. ‘‘Ejā imaṃ purisaṃ parikaḍḍhati tassa tasseva bhavassa abhinibbattiyā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Vañcanaṭṭhena māyā. Vaṭṭasmiṃ sattānaṃ jananaṭṭhena janikā. ‘‘Taṇhā janeti purisaṃ cittamassa vidhāvatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.55-57) hi vuttaṃ. Vaṭṭasmiṃ satte dukkhena saṃyojayamānā janetīti sañjananī. Ghaṭanaṭṭhena sibbinī. Ayañhi vaṭṭasmiṃ satte cutipaṭisandhivasena sibbati ghaṭeti, tunnakāro viya pilotikāya pilotikaṃ; tasmā ghaṭanaṭṭhena sibbinīti vuttā. Anekappakāraṃ visayajālaṃ taṇhāvipphanditanivesasaṅkhātaṃ vā jālamassā atthīti jālinī.
以牵引之义,就像水流湍急的河流一样,所以叫河流。或者以湿润之义,叫河流。正如这样说:“对众生来说,有河流、有润泽、有喜悦。”这里的意思就是既湿润又润泽。因为散布,所以叫散布者。因为扩散,所以叫散布者。因为广大,所以叫散布者。因为缠缚,所以叫散布者。因为欺诳,所以叫散布者。因为引夺,所以叫散布者。因为毒根,所以叫散布者。因为毒果,所以叫散布者。因为毒受用,所以叫散布者。又或者,那渴爱散布在色、声、香、味、触、法、家族、群体之中,所以叫散布者。以导致不幸和毁灭之义,就像龟缚线一样,所以叫线。正如这样说:“比丘们,‘线’就是喜贪的别名。”因为在色等之中散布,所以叫扩散。为了获得种种所得而令众生积聚,所以叫积聚者。因为不给予众生厌倦的机会,又以同伴之义,所以叫第二者。这渴爱不让众生于轮回中生起厌倦,所到之处,就像可爱的同伴一样,令其喜乐。因此说:巴利
Ākaḍḍhanaṭṭhena sīghasotā saritā viyāti saritā. Allaṭṭhena vā saritā. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘saritāni sinehitāni ca somanassāni bhavanti jantuno’’ti (dha. pa. 341). Allāni ceva siniddhāni cāti ayañhettha attho. Visatāti visattikā. Visaṭāti visattikā. Visālāti visattikā. Visakkatīti visattikā. Visaṃvādikāti visattikā. Visaṃharatīti visattikā. Visamūlāti visattikā. Visaphalāti visattikā. Visaparibhogāti visattikā. Visatā vā pana sā taṇhā rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe dhamme kule gaṇe vitthatāti visattikā (mahāni. 3). Anayabyasanapāpanaṭṭhena kummānubandhasuttakaṃ viyāti suttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘suttakanti kho, bhikkhave, nandīrāgassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.159). Rūpādīsu vitthataṭṭhena visaṭā. Tassa tassa paṭilābhatthāya satte āyūhāpetīti āyūhinī. Ukkaṇṭhituṃ appadānato sahāyaṭṭhena dutiyā. Ayañhi sattānaṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ ukkaṇṭhituṃ na deti, gatagataṭṭhāne piyasahāyo viya abhiramāpeti. Tena vuttaṃ –
以渴爱为伴侣的人,长久地流转于轮回之中;
不能超越这样存在和那样存在的轮回。巴利
‘‘Taṇhādutiyo puriso, dīghamaddhāna saṃsaraṃ; Itthabhāvaññathābhāvaṃ, saṃsāraṃ nātivattatī’’ti. (a. ni. 4.9; itivu. 15; mahāni. 191; cūḷani. pārāyanānugītigāthāniddesa 107);
以发愿之力而称为愿。它是有的引导者,也就是有的绳索。因为众生被这条绳索绑住脖子,就像被绳子系住脖子的牛一样,被牵引到各自想要去的地方。对那个那个所缘,它去贪恋、去亲近、去黏着,所以叫“林”。或者,它去乞求、去索求,所以也叫“林”。“林丛”这个词是通过词形扩展而来的。又或者,因为它是无意义之苦的生起处,因为它是稠密难出的,所以像树林一样,称为“林”;这是强烈渴爱的名字。而从更稠密难出的意义上说,比它更强烈的,就叫“林丛”。因此说:巴利
Paṇidhānakavasena paṇidhi. Bhavanettīti bhavarajju. Etāya hi sattā, rajjuyā gīvāya baddhā goṇā viya, icchiticchitaṭṭhānaṃ niyyanti. Taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ vanati bhajati allīyatīti vanaṃ. Vanati yācatīti vā vanaṃ. Vanathoti byañjanena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Anatthadukkhānaṃ vā samuṭṭhāpanaṭṭhena gahanaṭṭhena ca vanaṃ viyāti ‘vanaṃ’; balavataṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Gahanataraṭṭhena pana tato balavataro ‘vanatho’ nāma. Tena vuttaṃ –
砍掉丛林,勿砍树木;恐惧就是从丛林生出来的。
斩断了树林和林丛之后,比丘们,你们要成为无林者。巴利
‘‘Vanaṃ chindatha mā rukkhaṃ, vanato jāyate bhayaṃ; Chetvā vanañca vanathañca, nibbanā hotha bhikkhavo’’ti. (dha. pa. 283);
以亲近之力而称为亲密,意思是交往。这有两种:渴爱的亲密和朋友间的亲密。这里指的是渴爱的亲密。以爱染之力而称为爱着。因为造成执著而期待,所以叫期待。正如这样说:“大王,这八万四千座城,以王城拘舍婆提为首。大王,请在这里生起意欲,对生命作期待。”(长部2.266)这里的意思就是造成执著。因为系缚于各个不同的所缘,所以叫系属;或者以亲属之义,各别的亲属也叫系属。因为以常相依止之义,众生没有像渴爱这样的亲属。巴利
Santhavanavasena santhavo; saṃsaggoti attho. So duvidho – taṇhāsanthavo mittasanthavo ca. Tesu idha taṇhāsanthavo adhippeto. Sinehavasena sineho. Ālayakaraṇavasena apekkhatīti apekkhā. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘imāni te deva caturāsītinagarasahassāni kusāvatīrājadhānīpamukhāni. Ettha deva chandaṃ janehi, jīvite apekkhaṃ karohī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.266). Ālayaṃ karohīti ayañhettha attho. Pāṭiyekke pāṭiyekke ārammaṇe bandhatīti paṭibandhu. Ñātakaṭṭhena vā pāṭiyekko bandhūtipi paṭibandhu. Niccasannissitaṭṭhena hi sattānaṃ taṇhāsamo bandhu nāma natthi.
望之所以叫“望”,是因为它像不守护的人那样吞下所缘,又因为它在覆盖所缘、还没满足时就受用。这是它的意思。以希求的方式去希求,就是“希求”。“被希求的状态”就是“希求性”。现在为了显示它活动的地方,所以说了“色望”等。其中,取“望”为希求的意思,那么对色的望就是“色望”,这样应当知道有九个词。这里,前五个词是依五欲功德说的,第六个词是依资具贪说的,这特别是就出家者而言。从第六个词之后的三个词,是依不满足的事说的,是就在家者而言。因为他们对财产、儿子、生命,再没有别的更可爱的东西了。他们心里想:“这是我的,这是我的”,或者想:“某某给了我这个,给了我这个”,这样让众生低声念叨,所以叫“低语”。后面两个词是靠前缀辗转衍生出来的。再往后,因为开始用另一种方式分别,所以又说“低语”。低语的方式就是“低语性”,低语的状态就是“低语性状态”。对所缘一次又一次地贪取、拉扯,所以叫“贪”;贪的状态就是“贪性”;贪的方式就是“贪求”;与贪相应者的状态就是“贪求性状态”。巴利
Ārammaṇānaṃ asanato āsā. Ajjhottharaṇato ceva tittiṃ anupagantvāva paribhuñjanato cāti attho. Āsisanavasena āsisanā. Āsisitassa bhāvo āsisitattaṃ. Idāni tassā pavattiṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ rūpāsātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āsisanavasena āsāti āsāya atthaṃ gahetvā rūpe āsā rūpāsāti evaṃ navapi padāni veditabbāni. Ettha ca purimāni pañca pañcakāmaguṇavasena vuttāni. Parikkhāralobhavasena chaṭṭhaṃ. Taṃ visesato pabbajitānaṃ. Tato parāni tīṇi atittiyavatthuvasena gahaṭṭhānaṃ. Na hi tesaṃ dhanaputtajīvitehi aññaṃ piyataraṃ atthi. ‘Etaṃ mayhaṃ etaṃ mayha’nti vā ‘asukena me idaṃ dinnaṃ idaṃ dinna’nti vā evaṃ satte jappāpetīti jappā. Parato dve padāni upasaggena vaḍḍhitāni. Tato paraṃ aññenākārena vibhajituṃ āraddhattā puna jappāti vuttaṃ. Jappanākāro jappanā. Jappitassa bhāvo jappitattaṃ. Punappunaṃ visaye lumpati ākaḍḍhatīti lolupo. Lolupassa bhāvo loluppaṃ. Loluppākāro loluppāyanā. Loluppasamaṅgino bhāvo loluppāyitattaṃ.
“摇尾性”是指:就像狗在能得到利益的地方摇着尾巴、抖动着来回走动,那种渴爱就以这种摇动的状态而得名,叫做“摇动渴爱”。在可意和不可意的境界里都好好地去贪求,所以叫“善求者”;这种状态就是“善求性”。对母亲、姨母等不该起贪的地方生起的贪,叫“非法贪”;即使在该起贪的地方,但生起时力量很强的贪,叫“不平等贪”。或者依据“贪是不平等的”等说法(《分别论》924),无论在该处还是不该处生起的欲贪,从“非法”的意义上说是“非法贪”,从“不平等”的意义上说是“不平等贪”,应当这样理解。巴利
Pucchañjikatāti yāya taṇhāya lābhaṭṭhānesu, pucchaṃ cālayamānā sunakhā viya, kampamānā vicaranti, taṃ tassā kampanataṇhāya nāmaṃ. Sādhu manāpamanāpe visaye kāmetīti sādhukāmo. Tassa bhāvo sādhukamyatā. Mātā mātucchātiādike ayuttaṭṭhāne rāgoti adhammarāgo. Yuttaṭṭhānepi balavā hutvā uppannalobho visamalobho. ‘‘Rāgo visama’’ntiādivacanato (vibha. 924) vā yuttaṭṭhāne vā ayuttaṭṭhāne vā uppanno chandarāgo adhammaṭṭhena ‘adhammarāgo’, visamaṭṭhena ‘visamalobho’ti veditabbo.
以所缘的贪求为方式,就是贪求。以贪求的相为方式,就是贪求性。以希求为方式,就是希求。以贪羡为方式,就是贪羡。强烈的希求,就是强盛希求。对五种欲乐的爱著,就是欲爱。对色有与无色有的爱著,就是有爱。对被称为断灭的无有的爱著,就是无有爱。纯粹只对色有的爱著,就是色爱。对无色有的爱著,就是无色爱。与断灭见俱行的贪,就是见贪。对灭的爱著,就是灭爱。对色的爱著,就是色爱。对声的爱著,就是声爱。对香等的爱著,也同样是这个道理。暴流等项,已如前所说。巴利
Ārammaṇānaṃ nikāmanavasena nikanti. Nikāmanākāro nikāmanā. Patthanāvasena patthanā. Pihāyanavasena pihanā. Suṭṭhu patthanā sampatthanā. Pañcasu kāmaguṇesu taṇhā kāmataṇhā. Rūpārūpabhave taṇhā bhavataṇhā. Ucchedasaṅkhāte vibhave taṇhā vibhavataṇhā. Suddhe rūpabhavasmiṃyeva taṇhā rūpataṇhā. Arūpabhave taṇhā arūpataṇhā. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo diṭṭhirāgo. Nirodhe taṇhā nirodhataṇhā. Rūpe taṇhā rūpataṇhā. Sadde taṇhā saddataṇhā. Gandhataṇhādīsupi eseva nayo. Oghādayo vuttatthāva.
障碍善法,所以叫“障”。以覆盖为作用,所以叫“覆”。把众生绑在轮回里,所以叫“缚”。它靠近心、染污心、使心变得不清净,所以叫“随烦恼”。以顽固潜藏为特征,所以叫“随眠”。生起时缠住心,所以叫“缠”;意思是以不给善行生起机会而抓住善行之道。比如“盗贼缠在路上,恶棍缠在路上”(《小品》430)里,就是抓住道路的意思。这里也一样,应该按“抓住”这个意思来理解“缠”。以缠绕为特征,像藤蔓一样,所以叫“蔓”。在“藤蔓破土而立”(《法句》340)这句里,这渴爱也被称为藤蔓。想要各种各样的东西,所以叫“种种欲”。它是轮回之苦的根,所以叫“苦本”。正是这苦的因缘,所以叫“苦因”。这苦从它产生,所以叫“苦生”。以束缚为特征,像套索一样,所以叫“索”。魔罗的套索,所以叫“魔索”。以难以吞下、难以脱出为特征,像鱼钩一样,所以叫“钩”。魔罗的鱼钩,所以叫“魔钩”。被渴爱征服的人超不出魔罗的地盘,魔罗在他们上面行使权力,按这个说法,魔罗的地盘就叫“魔境”。以流动为特征,渴爱就像河流,所以叫“爱河”。以覆盖为特征,渴爱就像网,所以叫“爱网”。就像狗被皮带拴着,被人随意牵着走,同样,众生也被渴爱拴住。以绑得很牢为特征,像皮带一样,所以叫“爱索”。以难以填满为特征,渴爱就像大海,所以叫“爱海”。巴利
Kusaladhamme āvaratīti āvaraṇaṃ. Chādanavasena chādanaṃ. Satte vaṭṭasmiṃ bandhatīti bandhanaṃ. Cittaṃ upagantvā kilissati saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ karotīti upakkileso. Thāmagataṭṭhena anusetīti anusayo. Uppajjamānā cittaṃ pariyuṭṭhātīti pariyuṭṭhānaṃ; uppajjituṃ appadānena kusalacāraṃ gaṇhātīti attho. ‘‘Corā magge pariyuṭṭhiṃsu dhuttā magge pariyuṭṭhiṃsū’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 430) hi maggaṃ gaṇhiṃsūti attho. Evamidhāpi gahaṇaṭṭhena pariyuṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Paliveṭhanaṭṭhena latā viyāti latā. ‘‘Latā ubbhijja tiṭṭhatī’’ti (dha. pa. 340) āgataṭṭhānepi ayaṃ taṇhā latāti vuttā. Vividhāni vatthūni icchatīti vevicchaṃ. Vaṭṭadukkhassa mūlanti dukkhamūlaṃ. Tasseva dukkhassa nidānanti dukkhanidānaṃ. Taṃ dukkhaṃ ito pabhavatīti dukkhappabhavo. Bandhanaṭṭhena pāso viyāti pāso. Mārassa pāso mārapāso. Duruggilanaṭṭhena baḷisaṃ viyāti baḷisaṃ. Mārassa baḷisaṃ mārabaḷisaṃ. Taṇhābhibhūtā mārassa visayaṃ nātikkamanti, tesaṃ upari māro vasaṃ vattetīti iminā pariyāyena mārassa visayoti māravisayo. Sandanaṭṭhena taṇhāva nadī taṇhānadī. Ajjhottharaṇaṭṭhena taṇhāva jālaṃ taṇhājālaṃ. Yathā sunakhā gaddulabaddhā yadicchakaṃ nīyanti, evaṃ taṇhābaddhā sattāpīti daḷhabandhanaṭṭhena gaddulaṃ viyāti gaddulaṃ. Taṇhāva gaddulaṃ taṇhāgaddulaṃ. Duppūraṇaṭṭhena taṇhāva samuddo taṇhāsamuddo.
1066 在解释嗔的时候,“他对我做了没好处的事”,意思就是“他对我做了没有利益的事”。按照这个方法,所有词句的意思都应该这样理解。或者,“在没有理由的地方也发怒”,就是对没有原因的事也生气——因为有人会因为“天雨太多”而发怒,因为“不下雨”而发怒,因为“太阳太热”而发怒,因为“不热”而发怒,风吹的时候也发怒,不吹风的时候也发怒,扫不了地就对菩提树叶发怒,披不上衣就对风发怒,绊倒了就对树桩发怒,就是针对这些情况才说——“或者,在没有理由的地方也生起嗔怒”。其中,前面九种情况是针对众生而生起的,所以构成业道的差别。但对没有理由的事发怒,是针对诸行生起的,不构成业道的差别。让心生起嗔怒,就是“心的嗔怒”。比它更强烈的,是“抗拒”。以排斥的方式,就是“排斥”。违逆,就是“违逆”。以愤怒的方式,就是“怒”。“暴怒”“极暴怒”是通过前缀把词加强。以败坏的方式,就是“嗔”。“害”“极害”是通过前缀把词加强。心的败坏,就是心的毁坏、颠倒的状态。令意败坏而生起,就是“意害”。以愤怒的方式,就是“忿”。愤怒的状态,就是“愤怒”。已怒者的状态,就是“已怒性”。巴利
1066. Dosaniddese anatthaṃ me acarīti avuḍḍhiṃ me akāsi. Iminā upāyena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo. Aṭṭhāne vā pana āghātoti akāraṇe kopo – ekacco hi ‘devo ativassatī’ti kuppati, ‘na vassatī’ti kuppati, ‘sūriyo tappatī’ti kuppati, ‘na tappatī’ti kuppati, vāte vāyantepi kuppati, avāyantepi kuppati, sammajjituṃ asakkonto bodhipaṇṇānaṃ kuppati, cīvaraṃ pārupituṃ asakkonto vātassa kuppati, upakkhalitvā khāṇukassa kuppati idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – aṭṭhāne vā pana āghāto jāyatīti. Tattha heṭṭhā navasu ṭhānesu satte ārabbha uppannattā kammapathabhedo hoti. Aṭṭhānāghāto pana saṅkhāresu uppanno kammapathabhedaṃ na karoti. Cittaṃ āghātento uppannoti cittassa āghāto. Tato balavataro paṭighāto. Paṭihaññanavasena paṭighaṃ. Paṭivirujjhatīti paṭivirodho. Kuppanavasena kopo. Pakopo sampakopoti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Dussanavasena doso. Padoso sampadosoti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Cittassa byāpattīti cittassa vipannatā, viparivattanākāro. Manaṃ padūsayamāno uppajjatīti manopadoso. Kujjhanavasena kodho. Kujjhanākāro kujjhanā. Kujjhitassa bhāvo kujjhitattaṃ.
现在,为了说明在解说“不善”时已经讲过的方式,所以说了“嗔、嗔害”等这些话。因此,这里所说的“凡是这种心的怨恨……中略……已怒的状态”,以及前面用“嗔、嗔害”等方式所说的,这就叫作嗔。在这里应当这样连接理解。这样才不会犯重复的毛病。痴的解说,应当依照无痴解说中所说的相反方式来理解。不过,这一切将在《分别论注》中完整地显现出来。巴利
Idāni akusalaniddese vuttanayaṃ dassetuṃ doso dussanātiādi vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘yo evarūpo cittassa āghāto…pe… kujjhitatta’’nti ca idha vutto, ‘‘doso dussanā’’tiādinā nayena heṭṭhā vutto, ayaṃ vuccati dosoti. Evamettha yojanā kātabbā. Evañhi sati punaruttidoso paṭisedhito hoti. Mohaniddeso amohaniddese vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo. Sabbākārena panesa vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āvi bhavissati.
1079 从那些法来看,凡是与因相应的法,就是有因法;与那些因法相应的其他因法或非因法,也都是有因法。无因的解释也是这样。在这里,因本身就是因;当三因或二因同时生起时,也是有因。然而,与疑和掉举相应的痴虽然是因,却是无因。因相应二法的解释也是这样。巴利
1079.Tehidhammehi ye dhammā sahetukāti tehi hetudhammehi ye aññe hetudhammā vā nahetudhammā vā te sahetukā. Ahetukapadepi eseva nayo. Ettha ca hetu hetuyeva ca hoti, tiṇṇaṃ vā dvinnaṃ vā ekato uppattiyaṃ sahetuko ca. Vicikicchuddhaccasahagato pana moho hetu ahetuko. Hetusampayuttadukaniddesepi eseva nayo.
1091 在“有为二法”的解说中,针对前二法里所说的无为界,用了“那个法”这样的单数来指称。但在前二法里,因为提问时是用复数引出的,所以顺着问答的脉络,用了“这些法是非缘”这样的复数来说。在“这些法是有见”等地方,也是同样的道理。巴利
1091. Saṅkhatadukaniddese purimaduke vuttaṃ asaṅkhatadhātuṃ sandhāya yo eva so dhammoti ekavacananiddeso kato. Purimaduke pana bahuvacanavasena pucchāya uddhaṭattā ime dhammā appaccayāti pucchānusandhinayena bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ. Ime dhammā sanidassanātiādīsupi eseva nayo.
1101 在“某识所识二法”的解说中,“眼所识”是指应当以眼识来了知。其余词句也遵循同样的道理。这里,“某识所识”是指应当以眼识等当中的某一种来了知——或者以眼识了知,或者以耳识了知。“某识非所识”是指不应当以同样的眼识或耳识来了知。由于前面已经说过“若如此,因为两句意义不同,所以成为一个二法”,因此“那些是眼所识的法,不是那些耳所识的法”并不构成一个二法。然而,若取“色是眼所识,声不是眼所识”这个意义,就应当知道“那些是眼所识的法,不是那些耳所识的法;或者,那些是耳所识的法,不是那些眼所识的法”是一个二法。如此,以每一根为基础各作四组,应当知道总共分析了二十个二法。巴利
1101. Kenaci viññeyyadukaniddese cakkhuviññeyyāti cakkhuviññāṇena vijānitabbā. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca kenaci viññeyyāti cakkhuviññāṇādīsu kenaci ekena cakkhuviññāṇena vā sotaviññāṇena vā vijānitabbā. Kenaci na viññeyyāti teneva cakkhuviññāṇena vā sotaviññāṇena vā na vijānitabbā. ‘Evaṃ sante dvinnampi padānaṃ atthanānattato duko hotī’ti heṭṭhā vuttattā ‘ye te dhammā cakkhuviññeyyā na te dhammā sotaviññeyyā’ti ayaṃ duko na hoti. Rūpaṃ pana cakkhuviññeyyaṃ saddo na cakkhuviññeyyoti imamatthaṃ gahetvā ‘ye te dhammā cakkhuviññeyyā na te dhammā sotaviññeyyā, ye vā pana te dhammā sotaviññeyyā na te dhammā cakkhuviññeyyā’ti ayameko dukoti veditabbo. Evaṃ ekekaindriyamūlake cattāro cattāro katvā vīsati dukā vibhattāti veditabbā.
那么,难道不存在“有些法能被意识认知,有些法不能被意识认知”这种情况吗?所以这里才没有说这些二法吗?不是不存在,而是因为缺乏明确的界定,所以没有说。因为并不像“眼识不能认知的法”那样有一个明确的界定,意识也是如此,由于缺乏这样的界定,所以这里没有说这些二法。但“意识既能认知某些法,也不能认知某些法”这个意思是存在的。因此,即使没有明说,也应该按照能够成立的方式去理解。说到意识,如果以归类为意识所认知的欲界法来说,首先,欲界法本身有些能被某些意识认知,有些不能被认知。那些欲界法也能被色界等意识中的某些认知,有些不能被认知。以色界意识来说,欲界法有些能被某些色界意识认知,有些不能被认知。那些色界等法也能被同样的色界意识中的某些认知,有些不能被认知。然而,对于无色界意识来说,欲界法、色界法和出世间法都完全不能被认知。但无色界法有些能被某些无色界意识认知,有些不能被认知。而且那些无色界法也只有一些能被某些认知,一些不能被认知。对于出世间心来说,欲界法等完全不能被认知。至于出世间法,因为不能被涅槃所识知,所以有些能被某些出世间心认知,有些不能被认知;又因为道和果不能被识知,其中也只有一些能被某些认知,一些不能被认知。巴利
Kiṃ pana ‘manoviññāṇena kenaci viññeyyā kenaci na viññeyyā’ natthi? Tenettha dukā na vuttāti? No natthi, vavatthānābhāvato pana na vuttā. Na hi, yathā cakkhuviññāṇena aviññeyyā evāti vavatthānaṃ atthi, evaṃ manoviññāṇenāpīti vavatthānābhāvato ettha dukā na vuttā. Manoviññāṇena pana kenaci viññeyyā ceva aviññeyyā cāti ayamattho atthi. Tasmā so avuttopi yathālābhavasena veditabbo. Manoviññāṇanti hi saṅkhyaṃ gatehi kāmāvacaradhammehi kāmāvacaradhammā eva tāva kehici viññeyyā kehici aviññeyyā. Tehiyeva rūpāvacarādidhammāpi kehici viññeyyā kehici aviññeyyā. Rūpāvacarehipi kāmāvacarā kehici viññeyyā kehici aviññeyyā. Teheva rūpāvacarādayopi kehici viññeyyā kehici aviññeyyā. Arūpāvacarehi pana kāmāvacarā rūpāvacarā apariyāpannā ca neva viññeyyā. Arūpāvacarā pana kehici viññeyyā kehici aviññeyyā. Tepi ca kecideva viññeyyā keci aviññeyyā. Apariyāpannehi kāmāvacarādayo neva viññeyyā. Apariyāpannā pana nibbānena aviññeyyattā kehici viññeyyā kehici aviññeyyā. Tepi ca maggaphalānaṃ aviññeyyattā kecideva viññeyyā keci aviññeyyāti.
1102 在解说“漏”的时候,对五种欲乐的爱贪,就叫欲漏。对色界和无色界存在中的欲贪、对禅定的贪爱、与常见一起生起的贪,以及以生存为对象的渴求,就叫有漏。六十二种邪见,就叫见漏。在八种处里的无知,就叫无明漏。不过,对于各处提到的这些漏,为了不混淆,应当知道它们有一种分类等的差别。从义理上说,这些漏因为长久随伴的意义,所以就是一种。在律中,则以“为了防护现法漏、为了对治当来漏”而说为两种。在经中,先是在《六处相应》里说为三种:“贤友,有三种漏:欲漏、有漏、无明漏。”在《能破经》里说为五种:“比丘们,有导向地狱的漏,有导向畜生趣的漏,有导向饿鬼趣的漏,有导向人界的漏,有导向天界的漏。”在《六集·应供经》里说为六种:“有应当以防护而断的漏,有应当以受用而断的漏,有应当以忍受而断的漏,有应当以回避而断的漏,有应当以除遣而断的漏,有应当以修习而断的漏。”在《一切漏经》里,连同“应当以见而断的”一起说为七种。但在这里,这些漏按欲漏等的差别说为四种。其中,词义是这样:对称为五种欲乐的欲有漏,就是“欲漏”。对称为色界和无色界的、从业与投生两方面说的两种有有漏,就是“有漏”。见本身就是漏,所以是“见漏”。无明本身就是漏,所以是“无明漏”。巴利
1102. Āsavaniddese pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmāsavo nāma. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo jhānanikanti sassatadiṭṭhisahajāto rāgo bhavavasena patthanā bhavāsavo nāma. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo diṭṭhāsavo nāma. Aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu aññāṇaṃ avijjāsavo nāma. Tattha tattha āgatesu pana āsavesu asammohatthaṃ ekavidhādibhedo veditabbo. Atthato hete cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena āsavāti evaṃ ekavidhāva honti. Vinaye pana ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyā’’ti (pārā. 39) duvidhena āgatā. Suttante saḷāyatane tāva ‘‘tayome, āvuso, āsavā – kāmāsavo bhavāsavo avijjāsavo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.321) tividhena āgatā. Nibbedhikapariyāye ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, āsavā nirayagamanīyā , atthi āsavā tiracchānayonigamanīyā, atthi āsavā pettivisayagamanīyā, atthi āsavā manussalokagamanīyā, atthi āsavā devalokagamanīyā’’ti (a. ni. 6.63) pañcavidhena āgatā. Chakkanipāte āhuneyyasutte – ‘‘atthi āsavā saṃvarā pahātabbā, atthi āsavā paṭisevanā pahātabbā, atthi āsavā adhivāsanā pahātabbā, atthi āsavā parivajjanā pahātabbā, atthi āsavā vinodanā pahātabbā, atthi āsavā bhāvanā pahātabbā’’ti (a. ni. 6.58) chabbidhena āgatā. Sabbāsavapariyāye (ma. ni. 1.14 ādayo) ‘dassanapahātabbehi’ saddhiṃ sattavidhena āgatā. Idha panete kāmāsavādibhedato catubbidhena āgatā. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – pañcakāmaguṇasaṅkhāte kāme āsavo ‘kāmāsavo’. Rūpārūpasaṅkhāte kammato ca upapattito ca duvidhepi bhave āsavo ‘bhavāsavo’. Diṭṭhi eva āsavo ‘diṭṭhāsavo’. Avijjāva āsavo ‘avijjāsavo’.
1103 “关于欲”:指五种欲乐。欲贪是指被称为“欲”的贪,不是想做事的欲求,也不是对法的欲求。依于欲、依于染著,欲本身就是贪,所以叫欲贪。依于欲、依于欢喜,欲本身就是欢喜,所以叫欲喜。如此,在一切处了知“欲”的含义之后,应当知道:以渴爱的含义叫欲爱,以爱著的含义叫欲爱著,以烧灼的含义叫欲烧灼,以昏醉的含义叫欲昏醉,以吞没后彻底消化的含义叫欲耽著。“这被称为”:以这八种词句分别解说的,就称为欲漏。巴利
1103.Kāmesūti pañcasu kāmaguṇesu. Kāmacchandoti kāmasaṅkhāto chando, na kattukamyatāchando, na dhammacchando. Kāmanavasena rajjanavasena ca kāmoyeva rāgo kāmarāgo. Kāmanavasena nandanavasena ca kāmova nandīti kāmanandī. Evaṃ sabbattha kāmatthaṃ viditvā taṇhāyanaṭṭhena kāmataṇhā, sinehanaṭṭhena kāmasineho, pariḍayhanaṭṭhena kāmapariḷāho, mucchanaṭṭhena kāmamucchā, gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpanaṭṭhena kāmajjhosānanti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ aṭṭhahi padehi vibhatto kāmāsavo nāma vuccati.
1104 在诸有当中的“有欲”:只是以对色界有和无色界有的希求这种方式生起的欲,就是“有欲”。其余的词句也应当用同样的方法来理解。巴利
1104.Bhavesu bhavachandoti rūpārūpabhavesu bhavapatthanāvaseneva pavatto chando ‘bhavachando’. Sesapadānipi imināva nayena veditabbāni.
1105 “世间是常”等说法,是以十种方式来说明见的差别。其中,“世间是常”:这里是把五蕴执取为世间,然后执取“这个世间是常、是恒久、是永远存在”的人,生起以“常”为执取方式的见。“世间非常”:就是对同一个世间,执取“它断灭、它毁灭”的人,生起以断灭为执取方式的见。“世间有边”:得到小遍相的人,在像簸箕那么大或像钵那么大的遍相中入定,把定中现起的色法和无色法执为世间,又依据遍相的界限,执取“有边”,于是生起“世间有边”这种执取方式的见。这种见既可能是常见,也可能是断见。得到大遍相的人,则在那遍相中入定,把定中现起的色法和无色法执为世间,又依据遍相的界限,执取“无边”,于是生起“世间无边”这种执取方式的见。这种见既可能是常见,也可能是断见。巴利
1105.Sassato lokoti vātiādīhi dasahākārehi diṭṭhippabhedova vutto. Tattha sassato lokoti ettha khandhapañcakaṃ lokoti gahetvā ‘ayaṃ loko nicco dhuvo sabbakāliko’ti gaṇhantassa ‘sassata’nti gahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Asassatoti tameva lokaṃ ‘ucchijjati vinassatī’ti gaṇhantassa ucchedagahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Antavāti parittakasiṇalābhino ‘suppamatte vā sarāvamatte vā’ kasiṇe samāpannassa antosamāpattiyaṃ pavattitarūpārūpadhamme lokoti ca kasiṇaparicchedantena ca ‘antavā’ti gaṇhantassa ‘antavā loko’ti gahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Sā sassatadiṭṭhipi hoti ucchedadiṭṭhipi. Vipulakasiṇalābhino pana tasmiṃ kasiṇe samāpannassa antosamāpattiyaṃ pavattitarūpārūpadhamme lokoti ca kasiṇaparicchedantena ca ‘ananto’ti gaṇhantassa ‘anantavā loko’ti gahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Sā sassatadiṭṭhipi hoti, ucchedadiṭṭhipi.
认为命就是身体:因为把会坏灭的身体执取为“命”,所以当身体断灭时,就执取“命也断灭”,这是断灭见生起的行相。第二句:因为把命执取为与身体不同的另一个东西,所以即使身体断灭,也执取“命不断灭”,这是常见生起的行相。在“如来死后存在”等说法中,有情被称为如来。执取“如来死后存在”的,是第一种常见;执取“不存在”的,是第二种断见;执取“既存在又不存在”的,是第三种一分常见;执取“既非存在也非不存在”的,是第四种矫乱论。这些法是漏:这里把欲漏和有漏按贪归为一类,简略说是三种,详细说是四种,这些法就叫作漏。巴利
Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti bhedanadhammassa sarīrasseva ‘jīva’nti gahitattā sarīre ucchijjamāne ‘jīvampi ucchijjatī’ti ucchedagahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Dutiyapade sarīrato aññassa jīvassa gahitattā sarīre ucchijjamānepi ‘jīvaṃ na ucchijjatī’ti sassatagahaṇākārappavattā diṭṭhi. Hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇātiādīsu satto tathāgato nāma. So paraṃ maraṇā hotīti gaṇhato paṭhamā sassatadiṭṭhi. Na hotīti gaṇhato dutiyā ucchedadiṭṭhi. Hoti ca na ca hotīti gaṇhato tatiyā ekaccasassatadiṭṭhi. Neva hoti na nahotīti gaṇhato catutthā amarāvikkhepadiṭṭhi. Ime dhammā āsavāti ime kāmāsavañca bhavāsavañca rāgavasena ekato katvā, saṅkhepato tayo, vitthārato cattāro dhammā āsavā nāma.
如果有人对梵天的宫殿、如意树、装饰品等生起欲贪,那是欲漏吗?不是。为什么?因为对五欲功德的贪在这里就已经断除了。但到了因缘分组里,贪就叫作因;到了结缚分组里,就叫作贪欲身结;到了烦恼分组里,贪就叫作烦恼。那么,与见同时生起的贪,是欲漏吗?不是,那叫见贪。因为经中这样说:被见贪所染污的人,所布施的东西不会有大果报、不会有大功德。巴利
Yo pana brahmānaṃ vimānakapparukkhaābharaṇesu chandarāgo uppajjati, so kāmāsavo hoti na hotīti? Na hoti. Kasmā? Pañcakāmaguṇikassa rāgassa idheva pahīnattā. Hetugocchakaṃ pana patvā lobho hetu nāma hoti. Ganthagocchakaṃ patvā abhijjhākāyagantho nāma. Kilesagocchakaṃ patvā lobho kileso nāma hoti. Diṭṭhisahajāto pana rāgo kāmāsavo hoti na hotīti? Na hoti; diṭṭhirāgo nāma hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhirāgaratte purisapuggale dinnadānaṃ na mahapphalaṃ hoti, na mahānisaṃsa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.129).
这些漏既可以按烦恼的顺序来说明,也可以按道的顺序来说明。按烦恼的顺序来说:欲漏由不还道断除,有漏由阿罗汉道断除,见漏由入流道断除,无明漏由阿罗汉道断除。按道的顺序来说:见漏由入流道断除,欲漏由不还道断除,有漏和无明漏由阿罗汉道断除。巴利
Ime pana āsave kilesapaṭipāṭiyāpi āharituṃ vaṭṭati, maggapaṭipāṭiyāpi. Kilesapaṭipāṭiyā kāmāsavo anāgāmimaggena pahīyati, bhavāsavo arahattamaggena, diṭṭhāsavo sotāpattimaggena, avijjāsavo arahattamaggena. Maggapaṭipāṭiyā sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhāsavo pahīyati, anāgāmimaggena kāmāsavo, arahattamaggena bhavāsavo avijjāsavo cāti.
1121 在结缚中解说慢时,“我胜”这种慢,是以“我比别人优胜”的想法生起的慢;“我等”这种慢,是以“我和别人相等”的想法生起的慢;“我劣”这种慢,是以“我比别人低劣”的想法生起的慢。这样,胜慢、等慢、劣慢这三种慢,会在三种人身上生起。因为即使是优胜的人,也会生起“我优胜、我相等、我低劣”这三种慢;相等的人也一样,低劣的人也一样。其中,优胜者的胜慢是符合实情的慢,另外两种是不符合实情的慢;相等者的等慢是符合实情的慢,另外两种是不符合实情的慢;低劣者的劣慢是符合实情的慢,另外两种是不符合实情的慢。这说明了什么?说明了一个人身上会生起三种慢。但在《小事物》的“第一慢分别”里,则说一种慢会在三种人身上生起。巴利
1121. Saṃyojanesu mānaniddese seyyohamasmīti mānoti uttamaṭṭhena ‘ahaṃ seyyo’ti evaṃ uppannamāno. Sadisohamasmīti mānoti samasamaṭṭhena ‘ahaṃ sadiso’ti evaṃ uppannamāno. Hīnohamasmīti mānoti lāmakaṭṭhena ‘ahaṃ hīno’ti evaṃ uppannamāno. Evaṃ seyyamāno sadisamāno hīnamānoti ime tayo mānā tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ uppajjanti. Seyyassāpi hi ‘ahaṃ seyyo sadiso hīno’ti tayo mānā uppajjanti. Sadisassāpi, hīnassāpi. Tattha seyyassa seyyamānova yāthāvamāno, itare dve ayāthāvamānā. Sadisassa sadisamānova…pe… hīnassa hīnamānova yāthāvamāno, itare dve ayāthāvamānā. Iminā kiṃ kathitaṃ? Ekassa tayo mānā uppajjantīti kathitaṃ. Khuddakavatthuke pana paṭhamakamānabhājanīye eko māno tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ uppajjatīti kathito.
以慢的作用,称为慢。“妄想”“妄想性”这些说法,是从它的表现方式和状态来说明的。以高举的意义,称为高扬;它生起时,把那个人抬高、举起来安置,所以叫高举。以极度高举的意义,称为幢;以举起的意义,抬举其心,所以叫抬举。幢,是指在许多旗帜中最高耸的旗帜。慢也是一再地生起,依着种种所缘,以极度高举的意义,像幢一样,所以称为幢。希求幢,叫希幢,它的状态就是希幢性。不过,那只是心的状态,不是它自己的。因此说“希幢性,是心的”。与慢相应的心,希求幢;它的状态就是希幢性;所说的幢,就是慢。巴利
Mānakaraṇavasena māno. Maññanā maññitattanti ākārabhāvaniddesā. Ussitaṭṭhena unnati. Yassuppajjati taṃ puggalaṃ unnāmeti, ukkhipitvā ṭhapetīti unnamo. Samussitaṭṭhena dhajo. Ukkhipanaṭṭhena cittaṃ sampaggaṇhātīti sampaggāho. Ketu vuccati bahūsu dhajesu accuggatadhajo. Mānopi punappunaṃ uppajjamāno aparāpare upādāya accuggataṭṭhena ketu viyāti ‘ketu’. Ketuṃ icchatīti ketukamyaṃ, tassa bhāvo ketukamyatā. Sā pana cittassa, na attano. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘ketukamyatā cittassā’ti. Mānasampayuttañhi cittaṃ ketuṃ icchati. Tassa ca bhāvo ketukamyatā; ketusaṅkhāto mānoti.
1126 在解说嫉妒时,所谓“对于他人的利得、恭敬、尊重、敬爱、礼拜、供养生起嫉妒”,就是指对别人的这些利得等,心里想“他凭什么得到这些”,以挑剔、非难他人的成就为特征,这就是嫉妒。其中,“利得”是指获得衣服等四种生活所需。“恭敬”是指同样这些生活所需被妥善、美好地获得。“尊重”是指重视、看重。“敬爱”是指以心意去亲近、喜爱。“礼拜”是指以五体投地的方式礼敬。“供养”是指用香、花鬘等来供奉。以嫉妒的作用而称为嫉妒;嫉妒的表现状态是嫉妒性;处于嫉妒的状态是嫉妒性。usūyā 等词是嫉妒的同义词。巴利
1126. Issāniddese yā paralābhasakkāragarukāramānanavandanapūjanāsu issāti yā etesu paresaṃ lābhādīsu ‘kiṃ iminā imesa’nti parasampattikhiyyanalakkhaṇā issā. Tattha lābhoti cīvarādīnaṃ catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ paṭilābho. Issukī hi puggalo parassa taṃ lābhaṃ khiyyati, ‘kiṃ imassa iminā’ti na icchati. Sakkāroti tesaṃyeva paccayānaṃ sukatānaṃ sundarānaṃ paṭilābho. Garukāroti garukiriyā, bhāriyakaraṇaṃ. Mānananti manena piyakaraṇaṃ. Vandananti pañcapatiṭṭhitena vandanaṃ. Pūjanāti gandhamālādīhi pūjanā. Issāyanavasena issā. Issākāro issāyanā. Issāyitabhāvo issāyitattaṃ. Usūyādīni issādivevacanāni.
关于这种嫉妒,应当从在家者和出家者两方面来说明它以非难为特相。有些在家者靠农耕、经商等某种谋生方式,凭自己的努力,得到好车、坐骑或珍宝。另一个人却不想让他得到,对他的所得不满意,心想:“他什么时候会从这份成就中衰败,变成穷困潦倒的人呢?”当那人因某种原因从这份成就中衰败时,他就感到高兴。出家者中也有心怀嫉妒的人,看到别人凭自己的闻法、学修等而获得利养等成就,心想:“他什么时候会从这些利养等中衰败呢?”当他看到那人因某种原因衰败时,就感到高兴。应当这样理解:以非难他人的成就为特相,就是嫉妒。巴利
Imissā pana issāya khiyyanalakkhaṇaṃ āgārikenāpi anāgārikenāpi dīpetabbaṃ. Āgāriko hi ekacco kasivaṇijjādīsu aññatarena ājīvena attano purisakāraṃ nissāya bhaddakaṃ yānaṃ vā vāhanaṃ vā ratanaṃ vā labhati. Aparo tassa alābhatthiko tena lābhena na tussati. ‘Kadā nu kho esa imāya sampattiyā parihāyitvā kapaṇo hutvā carissatī’ti cintetvā ekena kāraṇena tasmiṃ tāya sampattiyā parihīne attamano hoti. Anāgārikopi eko issāmanako aññaṃ attano sutapariyattiādīni nissāya uppannalābhādisampattiṃ disvā ‘kadā nu kho eso imehi lābhādīhi parihāyissatī’ti cintetvā, yadā taṃ ekena kāraṇena parihīnaṃ passati, tadā attamano hoti. Evaṃ parasampattikhiyyanalakkhaṇā ‘issā’ti veditabbā.
1127 在解释“悭”的部分,为了从所依之事的角度说明悭,所以说了“五种悭:住所悭”等等。其中,对住所的悭吝,就是住所悭。其余各项也是同样的道理。巴利
1127. Macchariyaniddese vatthuto macchariyadassanatthaṃ ‘pañca macchariyāni āvāsamacchariya’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āvāse macchariyaṃ āvāsamacchariyaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
所谓“住所”,既包括整座寺院,也包括僧院、单人房,以及夜间住处、白天住处等。住在这些地方的人住得安乐,也能得到资具。如果有一位比丘,不愿一位具足行仪、令人信赖的比丘来到那里;即使对方已经来了,也想着“赶快走吧”,这就叫“住所悭”。但如果是不愿那些制造纷争之类的人住在那里,就不叫住所悭。巴利
Āvāso nāma sakalārāmopi pariveṇampi ekovarakopi rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānādīnipi. Tesu vasantā sukhaṃ vasanti paccaye labhanti. Eko bhikkhu vattasampannasseva pesalassa bhikkhuno tattha āgamanaṃ na icchati. Āgatopi ‘khippaṃ gacchatū’ti cinteti. Idaṃ ‘āvāsamacchariyaṃ’ nāma. Bhaṇḍanakārakādīnaṃ pana tattha vāsaṃ anicchato āvāsamacchariyaṃ nāma na hoti.
家,指的是护持者的家,也包括亲戚的家。在这里,如果一位比丘不愿意别人去那个家,那就是家悭。但如果是不愿意恶人去,那就不算悭,因为恶人正是致力于破坏那些人的净信。只有当他有能力保护那个家的信心,却仍不愿意那位比丘去时,才叫做悭。巴利
Kulanti upaṭṭhākakulampi ñātikulampi. Tattha aññassa upasaṅkamanaṃ anicchato kulamacchariyaṃ hoti. Pāpapuggalassa pana upasaṅkamanaṃ anicchantopi maccharī nāma na hoti. So hi tesaṃ pasādabhedāya paṭipajjati. Pasādaṃ rakkhituṃ samatthasseva pana bhikkhuno tattha upasaṅkamanaṃ anicchanto maccharī nāma hoti.
利得,就是指四种资具的利得。如果心里想“愿他得不到”,而得到的人正是一位具戒者,这就是利得悭。但如果见到有人糟蹋信众供养的东西,以不受用、胡乱受用等方式把它毁掉,甚至任由它腐坏也不肯给别人,看到这种情况后心想:“如果这个人得不到这东西,别的具戒者就能得到,就能拿去受用了”,这样想的人,就不算有悭。巴利
Lābhoti catupaccayalābhova. Taṃ aññasmiṃ sīlavanteyeva labhante ‘mā labhatū’ti cintentassa lābhamacchariyaṃ hoti. Yo pana saddhādeyyaṃ vinipāteti, aparibhogadupparibhogādivasena vināseti, pūtibhāvaṃ gacchantampi aññassa na deti, taṃ disvā ‘sace imaṃ esa na labheyya , añño sīlavā labheyya, paribhogaṃ gaccheyyā’ti cintentassa macchariyaṃ nāma natthi.
色相有两种:身体的色相和功德的色相。其中,对身体色相心怀吝啬的人,听到别人说“另一个人相貌端正、身形美好”时,就不愿意去说。对功德色相心怀吝啬的人,对于由戒、头陀支、修行、威仪所带来的功德色相,也不愿意去说。巴利
Vaṇṇo nāma sarīravaṇṇopi guṇavaṇṇopi. Tattha sarīravaṇṇe maccharipuggalo ‘paro pāsādiko rūpavā’ti vutte taṃ na kathetukāmo hoti. Guṇavaṇṇamaccharī sīlena dhutaṅgena paṭipadāya ācārena vaṇṇaṃ na kathetukāmo hoti.
“法”指教理之法和证悟之法。其中,圣弟子对证悟之法不悭吝,他们希望包括天人在内的世间也能证悟自己所证悟的法。他们希望“愿他人也能了知”这一证悟。而法悭只发生在经典教法上。具有法悭的人,对于自己所知的隐秘经典或论说途径,不愿让别人知道。如果有人审察了人之后,为了护持法而不传授,或者审察了法之后,为了护持人而不传授,这个人就不叫法悭者。巴利
Dhammoti pariyattidhammo ca paṭivedhadhammo ca. Tattha ariyasāvakā paṭivedhadhammaṃ na maccharāyanti, attanā paṭividdhadhamme sadevakassa lokassa paṭivedhaṃ icchanti. Taṃ pana paṭivedhaṃ ‘pare jānantū’ti icchanti. Tantidhammeyeva pana dhammamacchariyaṃ nāma hoti. Tena samannāgato puggalo yaṃ guḷhaṃ ganthaṃ vā kathāmaggaṃ vā jānāti taṃ aññaṃ na jānāpetukāmo hoti. Yo pana puggalaṃ upaparikkhitvā dhammānuggahena, dhammaṃ vā upaparikkhitvā puggalānuggahena na deti, ayaṃ dhammamaccharī nāma na hoti.
在这里,有一种人摇摆不定:有时候是沙门,有时候是婆罗门,有时候是尼乾陀。如果有个比丘心想:“这个人会破坏传承下来的经典,搅乱柔和微细的法义”而不传给他,这就叫审察了人之后,为了护持法而不传。如果他想:“这个法柔和微细,如果这个人接受了,会用别的说法来解释,暴露自己,然后就会败坏”而不传,这就叫审察了法之后,为了护持人而不传。但如果他想:“如果这个人接受了这个法,就有能力破坏我们的宗义”而不传,这个人就叫做法悭者。巴利
Tattha ekacco puggalo lolo hoti, kālena samaṇo hoti, kālena brāhmaṇo, kālena nigaṇṭho. Yo hi bhikkhu ‘ayaṃ puggalo paveṇiāgataṃ tantiṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ dhammantaraṃ bhinditvā āluḷissatī’ti na deti, ayaṃ puggalaṃ upaparikkhitvā dhammānuggahena na deti nāma . Yo pana ‘ayaṃ dhammo saṇho sukhumo, sacāyaṃ puggalo gaṇhissati aññaṃ byākaritvā attānaṃ āvikatvā nassissatī’ti na deti, ayaṃ dhammaṃ upaparikkhitvā puggalānuggahena na deti nāma. Yo pana ‘sacāyaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ gaṇhissati, amhākaṃ samayaṃ bhindituṃ samattho bhavissatī’ti na deti, ayaṃ dhammamaccharī nāma hoti.
在这五种悭吝当中,先说住处悭吝:他会投生为亚卡或饿鬼,然后在那处住所用头顶着垃圾到处走动。家族悭吝:看到别人在那个家族里做布施、恭敬等事时,他心里想“这个家族败坏了,这是我的家族”,于是血从口中涌出,肚子也腹泻,肠子一段段碎裂后排出。利养悭吝:对属于僧团或团体的利养生起悭吝,像享用个人物品一样享用之后,会投生为亚卡、饿鬼或大蟒蛇。色相悭吝、品德悭吝和教法悭吝:只称赞自己的容貌或德行,对别人的容貌或德行就说“这算什么色相”,挑剔种种过失,而且对任何人一点都不肯给予教法,结果自己变得丑陋,还成了哑巴。巴利
Imesu pañcasu macchariyesu āvāsamacchariyena tāva yakkho vā peto vā hutvā tasseva āvāsassa saṅkāraṃ sīsena ukkhipitvā vicarati. Kulamacchariyena tasmiṃ kule aññesaṃ dānamānanādīni karonte disvā ‘bhinnaṃ vatidaṃ kulaṃ mamā’ti cintayato lohitampi mukhato uggacchati, kucchivirecanampi hoti, antānipi khaṇḍākhaṇḍāni hutvā nikkhamanti. Lābhamacchariyena saṅghassa vā gaṇassa vā santake lābhe maccharāyitvā puggalikaparibhogaṃ viya paribhuñjitvā yakkho vā peto vā mahāajagaro vā hutvā nibbattati. Sarīravaṇṇaguṇavaṇṇamaccharena pariyattidhammamacchariyena ca attanova vaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇeti, paresaṃ vaṇṇe ‘kiṃ vaṇṇo eso’ti taṃ taṃ dosaṃ vadanto pariyattidhammañca kassaci kiñci adento dubbaṇṇo ceva eḷamūgo ca hoti.
另外,因为对住处悭吝,会在铁屋地狱里被烧煮;因为对家族悭吝,会所得利养很少;因为对利养悭吝,会投生到粪屎地狱;因为对色相悭吝,无论投生到哪里,都不会有好色相;因为对法悭吝,会投生到热灰地狱。巴利
Apica āvāsamacchariyena lohagehe paccati. Kulamacchariyena appalābho hoti. Lābhamacchariyena gūthaniraye nibbattati. Vaṇṇamacchariyena bhave bhave nibbattassa vaṇṇo nāma na hoti. Dhammamacchariyena kukkuḷaniraye nibbattatīti.
因为吝啬的心态,所以叫悭吝。吝啬的表现方式,就是悭吝的行为。被吝啬所控制、具有吝啬的人所处的状态,就是悭吝性。“只愿归我所有,不愿给别人”——对自己的一切所得都不愿意分给别人,这就叫自私。自私的状态叫极自私,这是微细悭吝的名称。不尊重别人的人,叫做鄙吝。这种人的状态就是鄙吝性,这是粗重悭吝的名称。具有这种悭吝的人,甚至会阻止别人去布施给其他人。经中也确实这样说过——巴利
Maccharāyanavasena maccheraṃ. Maccharāyanākāro maccharāyanā. Maccharena ayitassa maccherasamaṅgino bhāvo maccharāyitattaṃ. ‘Mayhameva hontu mā aññassā’ti sabbāpi attano sampattiyo byāpetuṃ na icchatīti viviccho. Vivicchassa bhāvo vevicchaṃ, mudumacchariyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Kadariyo vuccati anādaro. Tassa bhāvo kadariyaṃ. Thaddhamacchariyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tena hi samannāgato puggalo parampi paresaṃ dadamānaṃ nivāreti. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
悭吝的人怀着邪恶的念头,持有邪见,毫无恭敬心。
阻止别人布施,也阻挡别人乞讨食物。巴利
Kadariyo pāpasaṅkappo, micchādiṭṭhi anādaro; Dadamānaṃ nivāreti, yācamānāna bhojananti. (saṃ. ni. 1.132);
见到乞讨的人时,心因为刻薄而扭曲、收缩,所以叫“刻薄紧缩”。它的状态就是刻薄紧缩性。另一种说法是:刻薄紧缩性指的是用勺子舀饭时的情形。就像从满满一锅饭里舀饭时,用四周紧缩的尖勺子去舀,舀不满;悭吝的人心也是这样紧缩。心这样紧缩时,身体也跟着紧缩、蜷曲、退缩,无法舒展,所以悭吝被称为“刻薄紧缩性”。巴利
Yācake disvā kaṭukabhāvena cittaṃ añcati saṅkocetīti kaṭukañcuko. Tassa bhāvo kaṭukañcukatā. Aparo nayo – kaṭukañcukatā vuccati kaṭacchuggāho. Samatittikapuṇṇāya hi ukkhaliyā bhattaṃ gaṇhanto sabbatobhāgena saṅkuṭitena aggakaṭacchunā gaṇhāti, pūretvā gahetuṃ na sakkoti; evaṃ maccharipuggalassa cittaṃ saṅkucati. Tasmiṃ saṅkucite kāyopi tatheva saṅkucati, paṭikuṭati, paṭinivattati, na sampasāriyatīti maccheraṃ ‘kaṭukañcukatā’ti vuttaṃ.
心被执取,是指当以布施等方式去帮助别人时,心被遮蔽住,无法舒展开来,这就是心被覆盖、被抓住的状态。因为悭吝的人不愿意把自己的财物给别人,却想得到别人的财物,所以应当知道,它的特相就是:以“这个好东西只该是我的,不该是别人的”这种心态运作,从而隐藏自己的财物,或者执取自己的财物。这一品剩下的内容,意思都很浅显易懂。巴利
Aggahitattaṃ cittassāti paresaṃ upakārakaraṇe dānādinā ākārena yathā na sampasāriyati, evaṃ āvaritvā gahitabhāvo cittassa. Yasmā pana maccharipuggalo attano santakaṃ paresaṃ adātukāmo hoti parasantakaṃ gaṇhitukāmo, tasmā ‘idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhameva hotu, mā aññassā’ti pavattivasenassa attasampattinigūhanalakkhaṇatā attasampattiggahaṇalakkhaṇatā vā veditabbā. Sesaṃ imasmiṃ gocchake uttānatthameva.
这些结既可以按烦恼的顺序来列举,也可以按道的顺序来列举。按烦恼的顺序来说:欲贪结和嗔恚结由不还道断除,慢结由阿罗汉道断除,见结、疑结、戒禁取结由入流道断除,有贪结由阿罗汉道断除,嫉结和悭结由入流道断除,无明由阿罗汉道断除。按道的顺序来说:见结、疑结、戒禁取结、嫉结、悭结由入流道断除,欲贪结和嗔恚结由不还道断除,慢结、有贪结、无明由阿罗汉道断除。巴利
Imāni pana saṃyojanāni kilesapaṭipāṭiyāpi āharituṃ vaṭṭati maggapaṭipāṭiyāpi. Kilesapaṭipāṭiyā kāmarāgapaṭighasaṃyojanāni anāgāmimaggena pahīyanti, mānasaṃyojanaṃ arahattamaggena, diṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsā sotāpattimaggena, bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ arahattamaggena, issāmacchariyāni sotāpattimaggena, avijjā arahattamaggena. Maggapaṭipāṭiyā diṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsaissāmacchariyāni sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti, kāmarāgapaṭighā anāgāmimaggena, mānabhavarāgaavijjā arahattamaggenāti.
1140 在《结缚品》中,它把名身结缚起来,也就是以死亡与结生的方式,让它在轮回中连接起来,所以叫身结。即使是一切知者所说的,也加以否定,而固执“世间是常,只有这个是真实的,其他都是虚妄的”,以这种方式死死执取,所以叫此实执取。然而,因为贪求与欲贪之间有差别,所以在解析贪求身结时,没有说“对诸欲的欲求、欲贪”,而是说“凡是染着、坚着”等等。由此应当知道,前面所说的“对梵天宫殿等的欲求染着,不是欲漏,但到了结缚品中,就成为贪求身结”,这句话说得很好。后面的烦恼品也是同样的道理。除了戒禁取——因为戒禁取不是以“只有这个是真实的”等方式固执,而是以“依戒清净”等方式固执,所以在排除它时,虽然它也是邪见,却说“除了”。巴利
1140. Ganthagocchake nāmakāyaṃ gantheti, cutipaṭisandhivasena vaṭṭasmiṃ ghaṭetīti kāyagantho. Sabbaññubhāsitampi paṭikkhipitvā sassato loko idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti iminā ākārena abhinivisatīti idaṃsaccābhiniveso. Yasmā pana abhijjhākāmarāgānaṃ viseso atthi, tasmā abhijjhākāyaganthassa padabhājane ‘‘yo kāmesu kāmacchando kāmarāgo’’ti avatvā yo rāgo sārāgotiādi vuttaṃ. Iminā yaṃ heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ‘brahmānaṃ vimānādīsu chandarāgo kāmāsavo na hoti, ganthagocchakaṃ patvā abhijjhākāyagantho hotī’ti taṃ suvuttanti veditabbaṃ. Parato kilesagocchakepi eseva nayo. Ṭhapetvā sīlabbataparāmāsanti idaṃ yasmā sīlabbataparāmāso ‘idameva sacca’ntiādinā ākārena nābhinivisati, ‘sīlena suddhī’tiādinā eva pana abhinivisati, tasmā micchādiṭṭhibhūtampi taṃ paṭikkhipanto ‘ṭhapetvā’ti āha.
1162 在盖论中对惛眠的解说:心的不适性,就是心的病态。因为生病的人就被称为不适者。律藏中也这样说:尊者,我不是不适者。不堪任业性,就是所谓心病的状态,也就是不堪任的状态。消沉,就是消沉的状态。因为威仪时的心无法维持威仪,就像树上的蝙蝠,又像挂在桩上的糖蜜罐,消沉下去。针对这种状态,说为消沉。第二个词是依前缀而增强的。萎靡,就是因不扩展而蜷缩。其余两个词是对状态和实体性的解说。惛,如同凝固的酥油块,因不扩展而以坚厚状态安住。惛的状态是状态的解说。惛的状态性、惛的状态,就是依不扩展而僵硬之义。巴利
1162. Nīvaraṇagocchakassa thinamiddhaniddese cittassa akallatāti cittassa gilānabhāvo. Gilāno hi akallakoti vuccati. Vinayepi vuttaṃ – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhante, akallako’’ti (pārā. 151). Akammaññatāti cittagelaññasaṅkhātova akammaññatākāro. Olīyanāti olīyanākāro. Iriyāpathikacittañhi iriyāpathaṃ sandhāretuṃ asakkontaṃ, rukkhe vagguli viya, khīle laggitaphāṇitavārako viya ca, olīyati. Tassa taṃ ākāraṃ sandhāya olīyanāti vuttaṃ. Dutiyapadaṃ upasaggavasena vaḍḍhitaṃ. Līnanti avipphārikatāya paṭikuṭitaṃ. Itare dve ākārabhāvaniddesā. Thinanti sappipiṇḍo viya avipphārikatāya ghanabhāvena ṭhitaṃ. Thiyanāti ākāraniddeso. Thiyitabhāvo thiyitattaṃ, avipphāravaseneva thaddhatāti attho.
1163 “身”指的是由三蕴构成的名身。“不适业、不堪任”就是前面已经说过的那种情况。像乌云盖住天空一样盖住身,所以叫覆盖。从各个方面盖住,叫周遍覆盖。在内部阻挡住,叫内阻。就像城市被围困后,人们出不去一样,被睡眠阻挡住的法也无法以舒展的方式生起。因此说为内阻。让人受损,所以叫睡眠,意思是以不堪任的状态造成伤害。靠它来睡,所以叫睡。让眼睑等下垂,所以叫下垂。睡的状态、已睡的状态,这是从形态和名相两方面作的说明。至于它们前面那个“睡”字,之所以重复说,原因前面已经讲过。这叫作惛眠盖,也就是把惛和眠合在一起,以障碍之义称为惛眠盖。它大多数情况下在有学圣者和凡夫入睡前后生起,由阿罗汉道断除。但漏尽者因为所生身体的虚弱,会有有分流现起,他们在未混杂的情况下睡眠,那对他们来说就叫睡眠。因此世尊说:“火种,我记得在夏季最后一个月,铺好四重僧伽梨,右胁而卧,正念正知地入睡。”不过,这种所生身体的虚弱并不是道所断除的,在执受和非执受的情况下都存在。在执受的情况下,当漏尽者修行了漫长之路,或者做了某种劳作而疲倦时,就会在这种时候出现。在非执受的情况下,则存在于叶和花之中。有些树的叶子被太阳晒时展开,夜里合拢;莲花等花朵被太阳晒时开放,夜里又合拢。不过,这个睡眠是不善法,漏尽者没有这种睡眠。巴利
1163.Kāyassāti khandhattayasaṅkhātassa nāmakāyassa. Akallatā akammaññatāti heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Megho viya ākāsaṃ kāyaṃ onayhatīti onāho. Sabbatobhāgena onāho pariyonāho. Abbhantare samorundhatīti antosamorodho. Yathā hi nagare rundhitvā gahite manussā bahi nikkhamituṃ na labhanti, evampi middhena samoruddhā dhammā vipphāravasena nikkhamituṃ na labhanti. Tasmā antosamorodhoti vuttaṃ. Medhatīti middhaṃ; akammaññabhāvena vihiṃsatīti attho. Supanti tenāti soppaṃ. Akkhidalādīnaṃ pacalabhāvaṃ karotīti pacalāyikā. Supanā supitattanti ākārabhāvaniddesā. Yaṃ pana tesaṃ purato soppapadaṃ tassa punavacane kāraṇaṃ vuttameva. Idaṃ vuccati thinamiddhanīvaraṇanti idaṃ thinañca middhañca ekato katvā āvaraṇaṭṭhena thinamiddhanīvaraṇanti vuccati. Yaṃ yebhuyyena sekkhaputhujjanānaṃ niddāya pubbabhāgaaparabhāgesu uppajjati taṃ arahattamaggena samucchijjati. Khīṇāsavānaṃ pana karajakāyassa dubbalabhāvena bhavaṅgotaraṇaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ asammisse vattamāne te supanti, sā nesaṃ niddā nāma hoti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, aggivessana, gimhānaṃ pacchime māse catugguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno niddaṃ okkamitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387). Evarūpo panāyaṃ karajakāyassa dubbalabhāvo na maggavajjho, upādinnakepi anupādinnakepi labbhati. Upādinnake labbhamāno yadā khīṇāsavo dīghamaggaṃ gato hoti, aññataraṃ vā pana kammaṃ katvā kilanto, evarūpe kāle labbhati. Anupādinnake labbhamāno paṇṇapupphesu labbhati. Ekaccānañhi rukkhānaṃ paṇṇāni sūriyātapena pasāriyanti rattiṃ paṭikuṭanti, padumapupphādīni sūriyātapena pupphanti, rattiṃ puna paṭikuṭanti . Idaṃ pana middhaṃ akusalattā khīṇāsavānaṃ na hotīti.
这里可能会有人说:“睡眠不是不善法。为什么?因为它是色。色是无记的,而这个睡眠也是色。正因为如此,这里才用‘身的不适、不堪任’来指称‘身’。”如果仅仅因为说了“身的”,就把这个睡眠当成色法,那么身轻安等法也应该变成色法了。而“以身感受乐”“以身证得最上真理”这两句里,感受乐和证得最上真理也应该只靠色身了。所以,不能说“睡眠是色”。这里说的“身”,是指名身。如果是指名身,那为什么又说“睡”“垂下”呢?因为名身并不会睡,也不会垂下。就像“女根的特征、女根的相、女根的行为、女根的形态”这些,是因为它们是女根的果才这样说;同样,这里的“睡”等说法,也是因为它们是称为名身之病的睡眠的果才这样说。因为有睡眠时,这些才存在。这是依果来假名安立,所以睡眠虽然不是色法,也被说成“睡”“垂下”“睡的状态”“已睡的状态”。巴利
Tattha siyā – ‘‘na middhaṃ akusalaṃ. Kasmā? Rūpattā. Rūpañhi abyākataṃ. Idañca rūpaṃ. Tenevettha ‘kāyassa akallatā akammaññatā’ti kāyaggahaṇaṃ kata’’nti. Yadi ‘kāyassā’ti vuttamattenevetaṃ rūpaṃ, kāyapassaddhādayopi dhammā rūpameva bhaveyyuṃ. ‘Sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedeti’ (dha. sa. 163; dī. ni. 1.230) ‘kāyena ceva paramasaccaṃ sacchikarotī’ti (ma. ni. 2.183; a. ni. 4.113) sukhapaṭisaṃvedanaparamatthasaccasacchikaraṇānipi rūpakāyeneva siyuṃ. Tasmā na vattabbametaṃ ‘rūpaṃ middha’nti. Nāmakāyo hettha kāyo nāma. Yadi nāmakāyo, atha kasmā ‘soppaṃ pacalāyikā’ti vuttaṃ? Na hi nāmakāyo supati, na ca pacalāyatīti. ‘Liṅgādīni viya indriyassa, tassa phalattā. Yathā hi ‘itthiliṅgaṃ itthinimittaṃ itthikuttaṃ itthākappo’ti imāni liṅgādīni itthindriyassa phalattā vuttāni, evaṃ imassāpi nāmakāyagelaññasaṅkhātassa middhassa phalattā soppādīni vuttāni. Middhe hi sati tāni hontīti. Phalūpacārena, middhaṃ arūpampi samānaṃ ‘soppaṃ pacalāyikā supanā supitatta’nti vuttaṃ.
“令眼睑等不断开合,所以叫‘开合不休’”——从这一词义上,这个意思也已经成立了,因此睡眠不是色。以“覆盖”等说法,也表明了它不是色。因为色不会成为名身的“覆盖、周覆、内阻”。有人问:难道不正是因为这个理由,它才是色吗?因为非色不会成为任何事物的覆盖、周覆、内阻。如果真是这样,那它也不该成为障碍了。所以,正如欲贪等非色法以障碍之义而称为盖,同样,这也应当以覆盖等义而理解为具有覆盖等性质。再者,依照“断除五盖——这些心的随烦恼,能使智慧羸弱”的说法,这也是非色。因为色不是心的随烦恼,也不会使智慧羸弱。巴利
‘Akkhidalādīnaṃ pacalabhāvaṃ karotīti pacalāyikā’ti vacanatthenāpi cāyamattho sādhitoyevāti na rūpaṃ middhaṃ. Onāhādīhipi cassa arūpabhāvo dīpitoyeva. Na hi rūpaṃ nāmakāyassa ‘onāho pariyonāho antosamorodho’ hotīti. ‘Nanu ca imināva kāraṇenetaṃ rūpaṃ? Na hi arūpaṃ kassaci onāho, na pariyonāho, na antosamorodho hotī’ti. Yadi evaṃ, āvaraṇampi na bhaveyya. Tasmā. Yathā kāmacchandādayo arūpadhammā āvaraṇaṭṭhena nīvaraṇā, evaṃ imassāpi onāhanādiatthena onāhāditā veditabbā. Apica ‘‘pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese paññāya dubbalīkaraṇe’’ti (dī. ni. 2.146; saṃ. ni. 5.233) vacanatopetaṃ arūpaṃ. Na hi rūpaṃ cittupakkileso, na paññāya dubbalīkaraṇaṃ hotīti.
为什么没有呢?不是已经说过吗——巴利
Kasmā na hoti? Nanu vuttaṃ –
比丘们,有些沙门婆罗门喝谷酒、果酒,不戒除喝谷酒果酒。比丘们,这是沙门婆罗门的第一种垢秽。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā suraṃ pivanti merayaṃ, surāmerayapānā appaṭiviratā, ayaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamo samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ upakkileso’’ti (a. ni. 4.50).
另外也说过:“居士子,沉迷于谷酒、果酒、酒类放逸处有六种过患——现世财产损失、增长纷争、是诸病的处所、招致恶名、暴露私处、令智慧虚弱,这第六项就是。”这一点从现量上也能成立。就像酒进入腹中时,心被染污,智慧变弱,所以有人会想:像酒一样,昏眠也应该是心的染污和令智慧虚弱的因素。并非如此,因为这是从缘的角度来说明的。如果酒本身就是染污,那么在“舍弃这五种心的垢秽”或“比丘们,同样地,有这五种心的垢秽,被这些垢秽染污的心既不柔软,也不堪任,也不明净,而且脆弱,不能正确地入定以灭尽诸漏。哪五种?比丘们,欲贪是心的垢秽”或“比丘们,哪些是心的垢秽?贪求、不正当的贪是心的垢秽”等关于垢秽的说明中,就应该出现对酒的说明。然而,因为饮了它之后,那些心的染污和令智慧虚弱的垢秽才生起,所以,由于它是那些垢秽的缘,才从缘的角度这样说明。而昏眠本身就是心的染污和令智慧虚弱的因素,因此昏眠是无色的。巴利
Aparampi vuttaṃ ‘‘cha khome, gahapatiputta, ādīnavā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānānuyoge – sandiṭṭhikā dhanajāni, kalahappavaḍḍhanī, rogānaṃ āyatanaṃ, akittisañjananī, kopīnanidaṃsanī, paññāya dubbalīkaraṇītveva chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ bhavatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.248). Paccakkhatopi cetaṃ siddhameva. Yathā majje udaragate, cittaṃ saṃkilissati, paññā dubbalā hoti, tasmā majjaṃ viya middhampi cittasaṃkileso ceva paññāya dubbalīkaraṇañca siyāti. Na, paccayaniddesato. Yadi hi majjaṃ saṃkileso bhaveyya, so ‘‘ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese’’ti (ma. ni. 1.297) vā, ‘‘evameva kho, bhikkhave, pañcime cittassa upakkilesā, yehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ na ceva mudu hoti, na ca kammaniyaṃ, na ca pabhassaraṃ, pabhaṅgu ca, na ca sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāya. Katame pañca? Kāmacchando, bhikkhave, cittassa upakkileso’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.214) vā, ‘‘katame ca, bhikkhave, cittassa upakkilesā? Abhijjhā visamalobho cittassa upakkileso’’ti (ma. ni. 1.71) vā – evamādīsu upakkilesaniddesesu niddesaṃ āgaccheyya. Yasmā pana tasmiṃ pīte upakkilesā uppajjanti ye cittasaṃkilesā ceva paññāya ca dubbalīkaraṇā honti, tasmā taṃ tesaṃ paccayattā paccayaniddesato evaṃ vuttaṃ. Middhaṃ pana sayameva cittassa saṃkileso ceva paññāya dubbalīkaraṇañcāti arūpameva middhaṃ.
还有什么别的理由?从“相应”这个说法可以知道。因为《法集论》第1176节说:“昏沉睡眠盖与无明盖,既是盖,也是与盖相应的。”所以,从“相应”这个说法来看,这不是色法。因为色法根本不可能有“相应”这个称谓。也许有人会想:“这是按照它们实际存在的情况来说的。就像‘贝壳、砂砾、鱼群,或行或住’那样,是把它们合在一起、按照实际存在的情况来说的。因为砂砾只是住着,并不移动,另外两者既住着也移动。同样地,在这里,睡眠只是盖,并不相应;昏沉既是盖,也是相应的。把这一切合在一起,按照实际存在的情况,才说‘既是盖,也是与盖相应的’。而睡眠就像砂砾只是住着而不移动那样,只是盖,并不相应。所以,睡眠就是色法。”不对,因为色的体性根本成立不了。砂砾不移动,这一点不需要经典也能成立。所以,在那里按实际存在的情况来说,这个意义可以成立。但“睡眠是色法”这一点并没有成立。不能用这部经典来证明它有色的体性。由于睡眠的色体性成立不了,所以这不是按实际存在的情况来说的,睡眠是无色的。巴利
Kiñca bhiyyo? Sampayogavacanato. ‘‘Thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ avijjānīvaraṇena nīvaraṇañceva nīvaraṇasampayuttañcā’’ti (dha. sa. 1176) hi vuttaṃ. Tasmā sampayogavacanato nayidaṃ rūpaṃ. Na hi rūpaṃ sampayuttasaṅkhyaṃ labhatīti. Athāpi siyā – ‘yathālābhavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā hi ‘‘sippisambukampi sakkharakathalampi macchagumbampi carantampi tiṭṭhantampī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.249; ma. ni. 1.433) evaṃ ekato katvā yathālābhavasena vuttaṃ. Sakkharakathalañhi tiṭṭhati yeva na carati, itaradvayaṃ tiṭṭhatipi caratipi. Evamidhāpi middhaṃ nīvaraṇameva, na sampayuttaṃ , thinaṃ nīvaraṇampi sampayuttampīti sabbaṃ ekato katvā yathālābhavasena ‘‘nīvaraṇañceva nīvaraṇasampayuttañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Middhaṃ pana yathā sakkharakathalaṃ tiṭṭhateva na carati, evaṃ nīvaraṇameva, na sampayuttaṃ. Tasmā rūpameva middhanti. Na, rūpabhāvāsiddhito. Sakkharakathalañhi na caratīti vināpi suttena siddhaṃ. Tasmā tattha yathālābhavasenattho hotu . Middhaṃ pana rūpanti asiddhametaṃ. Na sakkā tassa iminā suttena rūpabhāvo sādhetunti middhassa rūpabhāvāsiddhito na idaṃ yathālābhavasena vuttanti arūpameva middhaṃ.
还有什么进一步的理由呢?从“已舍断”等说法可以知道。因为在《分别论》里这样说:“‘已离昏沉睡眠’:由于那昏沉睡眠已被舍断、已被吐弃、已被解脱、已被断除、已被出离,因此称为‘已离昏沉睡眠’”(分别论547);又说:“此心从这昏沉睡眠中净化、善净化、遍净化、解脱、善解脱、遍解脱,因此称为‘从昏沉睡眠净化心’”(分别论551)——像这样说了“已舍断”等。而“色”并不会被这样表述,所以昏沉睡眠也是无色的。不是这样,因为说了“心所生的不存在”。昏沉睡眠有三种——心所生、时节所生、食所生。因此,其中属于心所生的那种,在《分别论》中说了它在禅那心中不存在,但这并不能成立无色。所以昏沉睡眠是色。不是这样,正是因为色的体性不能成立。如果昏沉睡眠的色体性能够成立,才能得出这个结论。在那里说的是心所生的不存在,而这一点本身并不能成立,所以昏沉睡眠是无色的。巴利
Kiñca bhiyyo? ‘Cattattā’tiādivacanato. Vibhaṅgasmiñhi ‘‘vigatathinamiddhoti tassa thinamiddhassa cattattā vantattā muttattā pahīnattā paṭinissaṭṭhattā, tena vuccati vigatathinamiddho’’ti (vibha. 547) ca, ‘‘idaṃ cittaṃ imamhā thinamiddhā sodheti visodheti parisodheti moceti vimoceti parimoceti, tena vuccati thinamiddhā cittaṃ parisodheti’’ cāti (vibha. 551) – evaṃ ‘cattattā’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na ca ‘rūpaṃ’ evaṃ vuccati, tasmāpi arūpameva middhanti. Na, cittajassāsambhavavacanato. Tividhañhi middhaṃ – cittajaṃ utujaṃ āhārajañca. Tasmā yaṃ tattha cittajaṃ tassa vibhaṅge jhānacittehi asambhavo vutto, na arūpabhāvo sādhitoti rūpameva middhanti. Na, rūpabhāvāsiddhitova. Middhassa hi rūpabhāve siddhe sakkā etaṃ laddhuṃ. Tattha cittajassāsambhavo vutto. So eva ca na sijjhatīti arūpameva middhaṃ.
还有什么理由?从“应当断除”的说法来看。世尊确实在《增支部》6.73中说:“比丘们,断除六种法后,才有可能成就并安住于初禅。是哪六种?欲贪、嗔恚、惛眠、掉举、追悔、疑;而且,他对诸欲的过患已经用正慧清楚地看见了。”又在《增支部》5.51中说:“断除这五盖后,他以强有力的智慧,将了知自利或他利。”在这些经典中,也说了要断除惛眠。然而色并不是应当断除的。正如《分别论》1031所说:“色蕴应当被证知、应当被遍知,不应当被断除、不应当被修习、不应当被作证。”根据这个“应当断除”的说法,惛眠就是无色的。不对,因为色也有“应当断除”的说法。《中部》1.247和《相应部》3.33中说:“比丘们,色不是你们的,你们应当舍弃它。”在这里,确实也说了要断除色。所以,这个理由不成立。不对,因为说法的方式不同。在那部经中是这样说的:“比丘们,对色的欲贪的调伏,在那里就是断除。”(《相应部》3.25)这是从欲贪断除的角度来说色的断除,而不是像“断除六法”“断除五盖”那样,把色说成是直接应当断除的。因为说法方式不同,所以色不是惛眠。因此,那些“他断除这五种心的垢秽”等经典,以及由这些和其他经典,应当知道惛眠就是无色的。正如——巴利
Kiñca bhiyyo? Pahānavacanato. Bhagavatā hi ‘‘cha, bhikkhave, dhamme pahāya bhabbo paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ; katame cha? Kāmacchandaṃ, byāpādaṃ, thinamiddhaṃ, uddhaccaṃ, kakkuccaṃ, vicikicchaṃ; kāmesu kho panassa ādīnavo sammapaññāya sudiṭṭho hotī’’ti (a. ni. 6.73) ca, ‘‘ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya balavatiyā paññāya attatthaṃ vā paratthaṃ vā ñassatī’’ti (a. ni. 5.51) ca ādīsu middhassāpi pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Na ca rūpaṃ pahātabbaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘rūpakkhandho abhiññeyyo, pariññeyyo, na pahātabbo, na bhāvetabbo na sacchikātabbo’’ti (vibha. 1031) imassāpi pahānavacanato arūpameva middhanti. Na, rūpassāpi pahānavacanato. ‘‘Rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṃ, taṃ pajahathā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.247; saṃ. ni. 3.33). Ettha hi rūpassāpi pahānaṃ vuttameva. Tasmā akāraṇametanti. Na, aññathā vuttattā. Tasmiñhi sutte ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, rūpe chandarāgavinayo taṃ tattha pahāna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.25) evaṃ chandarāgappahānavasena rūpassa pahānaṃ vuttaṃ, na yathā ‘‘cha dhamme pahāya pañca nīvaraṇe pahāyā’’ti evaṃ pahātabbameva vuttanti, aññathā vuttattā, na rūpaṃ middhaṃ. Tasmā yānetāni ‘‘so ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya cetaso upakkilese’’tiādīni suttāni vuttāni, etehi ceva aññehi ca suttehi arūpameva middhanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi –
比丘们,有这五种障碍,是盖,会覆盖心,让智慧变弱。是哪五种呢?比丘们,欲贪是障碍,是盖……昏沉睡眠,比丘们,是障碍,是盖,会覆盖心,让智慧变弱。(相应部5.220)还有:“比丘们,昏沉睡眠盖会让人盲目,让人没有眼,让人没有智,会灭掉智慧,属于伤害的一方,不导向涅槃。”(相应部5.221)还有:“婆罗门,就像这样,当心被昏沉睡眠缠住、被昏沉睡眠控制而住时……”(相应部5.236)还有:“比丘们,不恰当地作意时,还没生起的欲贪就会生起……还没生起的昏沉睡眠就会生起。”(相应部5.216)还有:“比丘们,这纯粹就是不善的聚集,也就是这五盖。”(相应部5.371)巴利
‘‘Pañcime, bhikkhave, āvaraṇā nīvaraṇā cetaso ajjhāruhā paññāya dubbalīkaraṇā. Katame pañca? Kāmacchando, bhikkhave, āvaraṇo nīvaraṇo…pe… thinamiddhaṃ, bhikkhave, āvaraṇaṃ nīvaraṇaṃ cetaso ajjhāruhaṃ paññāya dubbalīkaraṇa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.220) ca, ‘‘thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ, bhikkhave, andhakaraṇaṃ acakkhukaraṇaṃ aññāṇakaraṇaṃ paññānirodhikaṃ vighātapakkhikaṃ anibbānasaṃvattanika’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.221) ca, ‘‘evameva kho, brāhmaṇa, yasmiṃ samaye thinamiddhapariyuṭṭhitena cetasā viharati thinamiddhaparetenā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.236) ca, ‘‘ayoniso, bhikkhave, manasikaroto anuppanno ceva kāmacchando uppajjati…pe… anuppannañceva thinamiddhaṃ uppajjatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.216) ca, ‘‘kevalohāyaṃ, bhikkhave, akusalarāsi yadidaṃ pañca nīvaraṇā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.371) ca –
像这样阐明无色法的经典,已经说了很多。又因为它是无色法,所以在无色界也能生起。这在《大论·发趣论》中已经说过:“缘盖法而生起盖法,不是依前生缘。”在对此的分别解释中,应当详细展开:“在无色界,缘欲贪盖而生起惛眠……掉举、无明盖。”(《发趣论》3.8.8)因此,在这里应当得出结论:惛眠就是无色法。巴利
Evamādīni ca anekāni etassa arūpabhāvajotakāneva suttāni vuttāni. Yasmā cetaṃ arūpaṃ tasmā āruppepi uppajjati. Vuttañhetaṃ mahāpakaraṇe paṭṭhāne – ‘‘nīvaraṇaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca nīvaraṇo dhammo uppajjati, na purejātapaccayā’’ti etassa vibhaṅge ‘‘āruppe kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ paṭicca thinamiddhaṃ… uddhaccaṃ avijjānīvaraṇa’’nti (paṭṭhā. 3.8.8) sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Tasmā sanniṭṭhānamettha gantabbaṃ arūpameva middhanti.
1166 在“追悔”这一节里,“于不许可作许可想”等话,是为了从根本上指出追悔。因为当人依这些想而犯了戒,事犯已经完成,即使后来正念现前,也会懊悔:“我做了坏事。”这样事后懊恼,就生起追悔。为了从根本上说明这一点,才说“于不许可作许可想”等。
其中,把不许可的食物当成许可的来吃;把不许可的肉当成许可的肉——比如把熊肉当成猪肉、把豹肉当成鹿肉来吃;在非时想成是时,已经受遮止却想成未受遮止,钵里有尘垢落下却想成已经受取,就这样来吃——这就叫“于不许可作许可想”而犯戒。
反过来,把猪肉当成熊肉来吃,或者在正时想成非时而吃,这就叫“于许可作不许可想”而犯戒。
把某些本来没有过失的想成有过失,把有过失的想成没有过失而去做,这就叫“于无过失作过失想、于过失作无过失想”而犯戒。
然而,这种追悔也会在“我确实没做善、没做福、没做怖畏的防护,却做了恶、做了残暴、做了罪过”这样于无过失作过失想而犯戒时生起,所以为了开许其他事由,又说“凡是这样的”等等。巴利
1166. Kukkuccaniddese akappiye kappiyasaññitātiādīni mūlato kukkuccadassanatthaṃ vuttāni. Evaṃsaññitāya hi kate vītikamme, niṭṭhite vatthujjhācāre, puna sañjātasatinopi ‘duṭṭhu mayā kata’nti evaṃ anutappamānassa pacchānutāpavasenetaṃ uppajjati. Tena taṃ mūlato dassetuṃ ‘akappiye kappiyasaññitā’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha akappiyabhojanaṃ kappiyasaññī hutvā paribhuñjati, akappiyamaṃsaṃ kappiyamaṃsasaññī hutvā, acchamaṃsaṃ sūkaramaṃsanti, dīpimaṃsaṃ vā migamaṃsanti khādati; kāle vītivatte kālasaññāya, pavāretvā appavāritasaññāya, pattasmiṃ raje patite paṭiggahitasaññāya bhuñjati – evaṃ ‘akappiye kappiyasaññāya’ vītikkamaṃ karoti nāma. Sūkaramaṃsaṃ pana acchamaṃsasaññāya khādamāno, kāle ca vikālasaññāya bhuñjamāno ‘kappiye akappiyasaññitāya’ vītikkamaṃ karoti nāma. Anavajjaṃ pana kiñcideva vajjasaññitāya, vajjañca anavajjasaññitāya karonto ‘anavajje vajjasaññāya vajje ca anavajjasaññāya’ vītikkamaṃ karoti nāma. Yasmā panetaṃ ‘‘akataṃ vata me kalyāṇaṃ, akataṃ kusalaṃ, akataṃ bhīruttāṇaṃ, kataṃ pāpaṃ, kataṃ luddaṃ, kataṃ kibbisa’’nti evaṃ anavajje vajjasaññitāyapi kate vītikkame uppajjati, tasmāssa aññampi vatthuṃ anujānanto yaṃ evarūpantiādimāha.
这里,“追悔”这个词的意思前面已经讲过了。追悔的状态叫“追悔性”。被追悔所侵扰的状态叫“被追悔侵扰性”。所谓“心的懊悔”,在这里指的是对已做或未做的事、有罪或无罪的回想浮现于心中。然而,它并不能让已做的恶变成没做,也不能让未做的善变成已做,所以它是颠倒而可厌的懊悔,因此叫“懊悔”。为了表明这是就心而言,而不是就众生而言,所以说“心的”懊悔。这是对它的自性的说明。而当追悔生起时,它就像用针尖刮铜盘一样刮擦着心生起,因此说“心之刮擦”,这是对它的作用的说明。至于律藏中所说的:“那时,具寿舍利弗因为世尊制定禁止后,一再食用住处食而心生追悔,所以没有接受。”(《波逸提》204)这里的追悔并不是指盖,因为阿拉汉不会有“我做了恶事”这样的懊恼。它只是相似于盖、称为“是否许可”的审察,在律藏中名为追悔。巴利
Tattha kukkuccapadaṃ vuttatthameva. Kukkuccāyanākāro kukkuccāyanā. Kukkuccena ayitassa bhāvo kukkuccāyitattaṃ. Cetaso vippaṭisāroti ettha katākatassa sāvajjānavajjassa vā abhimukhagamanaṃ ‘vippaṭisāro’ nāma. Yasmā pana so kataṃ vā pāpaṃ akataṃ na karoti, akataṃ vā kalyāṇaṃ kataṃ na karoti, tasmā virūpo kucchito vā paṭisāroti ‘vippaṭisāro’. So pana cetaso, na sattassāti ñāpanatthaṃ ‘cetaso’ vippaṭisāroti vuttaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāvaniddeso. Uppajjamānaṃ pana kukkuccaṃ āraggamiva kaṃsapattaṃ manaṃ vilikhamānameva uppajjati, tasmā manovilekhoti vuttaṃ. Ayamassa kiccaniddeso. Yaṃ pana vinaye ‘‘atha kho āyasmā sāriputto bhagavatā paṭikkhittaṃ anuvasitvā anuvasitvā āvasathapiṇḍaṃ paribhuñjitu’’nti kukkuccāyanto na paṭiggahesīti (pāci. 204) kukkuccaṃ āgataṃ, na taṃ nīvaraṇaṃ. Na hi arahato ‘duṭṭhu mayā idaṃ kata’nti evaṃ anutāpo atthi. Nīvaraṇapatirūpakaṃ panetaṃ ‘kappati na kappatī’ti vīmaṃsanasaṅkhātaṃ vinayakukkuccaṃ nāma.
1176 在解释“哪些法既是盖又与盖相应”这一句时,因为昏沉和睡眠彼此不相分离,所以把昏沉睡眠盖与无明盖合在一起,不分开来说,而说为“既是盖又与盖相应”。但是,因为即使有掉举而没有追悔时,掉举也能离开追悔单独生起,所以把它分开来说。又应当知道,凡是与某法不相应的,就不能说它与该法相应结合。巴利
1176.‘‘Katame dhammā nīvaraṇā ceva nīvaraṇasampayuttā cā’’ti padassa niddese yasmā thinamiddhaṃ aññamaññaṃ na vijahati, tasmā thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ avijjānīvaraṇena nīvaraṇañceva nīvaraṇasampayuttañcāti abhinditvā vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana uddhacce satipi kukkuccassa abhāvā kukkuccena vināpi uddhaccaṃ uppajjati, tasmā taṃ bhinditvā vuttaṃ. Yañca yena sampayogaṃ na gacchati, taṃ na yojitanti veditabbaṃ.
这些盖既可以按烦恼的次序来讲,也可以按道的次序来讲。按烦恼的次序来说:欲贪和嗔恚由不还道断除,惛沉睡眠和掉举由阿罗汉道断除,追悔和疑由入流道断除,无明由阿罗汉道断除。按道的次序来说:由入流道断除追悔和疑,由不还道断除欲贪和嗔恚,由阿罗汉道断除惛沉睡眠、掉举和无明。巴利
Ime pana nīvaraṇe kilesapaṭipāṭiyāpi āharituṃ vaṭṭati maggapaṭipāṭiyāpi. Kilesapaṭipāṭiyā kāmacchandabyāpādā anāgāmimaggena pahīyanti, thinamiddhuddhaccāni arahattamaggena, kukkuccavicikicchā sotāpattimaggena, avijjā arahattamaggena. Maggapaṭipāṭiyā sotāpattimaggena kukkuccavicikicchā pahīyanti, anāgāmimaggena kāmacchandabyāpādā, arahattamaggena thinamiddhuddhaccāvijjāti.
1182 在邪执聚中,“除了那些法”这句话,是按提问的方式而用了复数形式。巴利
1182. Parāmāsagocchake te dhamme ṭhapetvāti pucchāsabhāgena bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ.
1219 在解释“取”的时候,执取被称为所依的欲,所以叫“欲取”;这欲本身也就是取,所以叫“欲取”。“取”就是紧紧抓住。这里的前缀“upa-”有“紧、牢固”的意思,就像在“upāyāsa(逼恼)”“upakaṭṭha(逼近)”这些词里一样。同样,见本身也就是取,所以叫“见取”;执取见,所以叫“见取”。因为在“我与世界是常”等说法中,后来的见执取了先前的见。同样,执取戒禁,所以叫“戒禁取”;戒禁本身也就是取,所以也叫“戒禁取”。像牛戒、牛行这些,因为固执地认为“这样就能清净”,它们本身就成了取。同样,依它而说,所以叫“说”(vāda);依它而执取,所以叫“取”(upādāna)。说什么、执取什么呢?执取“我”。或者,对“我”的说的执取,就是“我语取”;或者,依它而执取“只是我的说法,这就是我”,所以叫“我语取”。巴利
1219. Upādānaniddese vatthusaṅkhātaṃ kāmaṃ upādiyatīti kāmupādānaṃ kāmo ca so upādānañcātipi kāmupādānaṃ. Upādānanti daḷhaggahaṇaṃ. Daḷhattho hi ettha upasaddo upāyāsaupakaṭṭhādīsu viya. Tathā diṭṭhi ca sā upādānañcāti diṭṭhupādānaṃ. Diṭṭhiṃ upādiyatīti diṭṭhupādānaṃ. ‘Sassato attā ca loko cā’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.31) hi purimadiṭṭhiṃ uttaradiṭṭhi upādiyahi. Tathā sīlabbataṃ upādiyatīti sīlabbatupādānaṃ. Sīlabbatañca taṃ upādānañcātipi sīlabbatupādānaṃ. Gosīlagovatādīni hi ‘evaṃ suddhī’ti abhinivesato sayameva upādānāni. Tathā, vadanti etenāti ‘vādo’; upādiyanti etenāti ‘upādānaṃ’. Kiṃ vadanti, upādiyanti vā? Attānaṃ. Attano vādupādānaṃ attavādupādānaṃ; ‘attavādamattameva vā attā’ti upādiyanti etenāti attavādupādānaṃ.
1220 在“于诸欲中的欲贪”这一句里,这里的“欲”同样是指事欲,而且是指全部事欲,没有遗漏。因此,对事欲的欲贪,在这里就是欲取;这样一来,即使是不还果者,这种欲取也仍然成立。不过,他已经没有以五种欲功德为对象的欲爱了。巴利
1220.Yo kāmesu kāmacchandoti etthāpi vatthukāmāva anavasesato kāmāti adhippetā. Tasmā vatthukāmesu kāmacchando idha kāmupādānanti anāgāminopi taṃ siddhaṃ hoti. Pañcakāmaguṇavatthuko panassa kāmarāgova natthīti.
1221 在“见取”的解说中,“无布施”:他知道布施是存在的,能够给任何人任何东西;但他执取布施没有果报。“无供养”:供养指的是大祭祀。他知道可以举行祭祀;但他执取供养没有果报。“无献供”:献供指的是款待宾客、亲友等吉祥仪式。他知道可以做这些事;但他执取这些事没有果报。“无善行、无恶行”:在这里,十善业道叫善行,十不善业道叫恶行。他知道这些是存在的,但执取它们没有果报。“无此世界”:站在他世界的角度,执取此世界不存在。“无他世界”:站在此世界的角度,执取他世界不存在。“无母、无父”:他知道母亲、父亲是存在的,但执取对他们所做善行没有任何果报。“无化生有情”:他执取没有死后投生、化生的众生。“无正行、正修的沙门婆罗门”:他执取世间没有随顺正道修行的如法沙门和婆罗门。“没有那些自己以殊胜智慧证知此世界和他世界之后而宣说的人”:他执取没有能以自己殊胜的智慧证知此世界和他世界之后而宣说的一切知者佛陀。巴利
1221. Diṭṭhupādānaniddese natthi dinnanti. Dinnaṃ nāma atthi, sakkā kassaci kiñci dātunti jānāti; dinnassa pana phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi yiṭṭhanti. Yiṭṭhaṃ vuccati mahāyāgo. Taṃ yajituṃ sakkāti jānāti; yiṭṭhassa pana phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi hutanti āhunapāhunamaṅgalakiriyā. Taṃ kātuṃ sakkāti jānāti; tassa pana phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi, sukatadukkaṭānanti ettha dasa kusalakammapathā sukatakammāni nāma. Dasa akusalakammapathā dukkaṭakammāni nāma. Tesaṃ atthibhāvaṃ jānāti phalaṃ vipāko pana natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi ayaṃ lokoti paraloke ṭhito imaṃ lokaṃ natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi paralokoti idha loke ṭhito paralokaṃ natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi mātā natthi pitāti mātāpitūnaṃ atthibhāvaṃ jānāti, tesu katapaccayena koci phalaṃ vipāko natthīti gaṇhāti. Natthi sattā opapātikāti cavanakaupapajjanakā sattā natthīti gaṇhāti. Sammaggatā sammā paṭipannāti anulomapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannā dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇā lokasmiṃ natthīti gaṇhāti. Ye imañca lokaṃ parañca lokaṃ sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentīti imañca lokaṃ parañca lokaṃ attanāva abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena ñatvā pavedanasamattho sabbaññū buddho nāma natthīti gaṇhāti.
这些取既可以按烦恼的次第来说明,也可以按道的次第来说明。按烦恼的次第来说,欲取由四种道断除,其余三种取由入流道断除。按道的次第来说,见取等由入流道断除,欲取则由四种道断除。巴利
Imāni pana upādānāni kilesapaṭipāṭiyāpi āharituṃ vaṭṭati maggapaṭipāṭiyāpi. Kilesapaṭipāṭiyā kāmupādānaṃ catūhi maggehi pahīyati, sesāni tīṇi sotāpattimaggena. Maggapaṭipāṭiyā sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhupādānādīni pahīyanti, catūhi maggehi kāmupādānanti.
1235 在烦恼品里,烦恼本身就是烦恼的立足处。或者说,因为未断尽烦恼的众生安住在贪等之中、以贪等为立足点,所以叫“处”。烦恼既是那些众生安住的地方,也是他们的立足处,所以叫“烦恼处”。而且在这里,以无间缘等方式生起的烦恼也确实是安住着的,因此烦恼的立足处也叫“烦恼处”。巴利
1235. Kilesagocchake kilesā eva kilesavatthūni. Vasanti vā ettha akhīṇāsavā sattā lobhādīsu patiṭṭhitattāti ‘vatthūni’. Kilesā ca te tappatiṭṭhānaṃ sattānaṃ vatthūni cāti ‘kilesavatthūni’. Yasmā cettha anantarapaccayādibhāvena uppajjamānā kilesāpi vasanti eva nāma, tasmā kilesānaṃ vatthūnītipi ‘kilesavatthūni’.
1236 在这里,什么是贪?就是那染着、极染着。这个贪,在因品、结品和这里的烦恼品这三处,是以超过一百个词句来说明的;在漏、结、暴流、轭、盖、取这些品类中,则是各以八个词句来说明的。应当知道,这个贪不论是在以超过一百个词句说明的地方,还是在以八个词句说明的地方,都是完全被涵盖的。在因、结、盖、取、烦恼品这些当中,为四道所断的渴爱只以一种分类存在;而在漏、结、暴流、轭当中,为四道所断的渴爱则成为两种分类而存在。如何呢?在漏中,就是欲漏、有漏;在结中,就是欲贪结、有贪结;在暴流中,就是欲暴流、有暴流;在轭中,就是欲轭、有轭。巴利
1236.Tattha katamo lobho? Yo rāgo sārāgoti ayaṃ pana lobho hetugocchake ganthagocchake imasmiṃ kilesagocchaketi tīsu ṭhānesu atirekapadasatena niddiṭṭho. Āsavasaṃyojanaoghayoganīvaraṇaupādānagocchakesu aṭṭhahi aṭṭhahi padehi niddiṭṭho. Svāyaṃ atirekapadasatena niddiṭṭhaṭṭhānepi aṭṭhahi aṭṭhahi padehi niddiṭṭhaṭṭhānepi nippadesatova gahitoti veditabbo. Tesu hetuganthanīvaraṇaupādānakilesagocchakesu catumaggavajjhā taṇhā ekeneva koṭṭhāsena ṭhitā. Āsavasaṃyojanaoghayogesu catumaggavajjhāpi dve koṭṭhāsā hutvā ṭhitā. Kathaṃ? Āsavesu kāmāsavo bhavāsavoti, saṃyojanesu kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ bhavarāgasaṃyojananti, oghesu kāmogho bhavoghoti, yogesu kāmayogo bhavayogoti.
这些烦恼事,既可以按烦恼的顺序来说明,也可以按道的顺序来说明。按烦恼的顺序来说:贪由四种道断除,嗔由不还道断除,痴和慢由阿罗汉道断除,见和疑由入流道断除,昏沉等由阿罗汉道断除。按道的顺序来说:由入流道断除见和疑,由不还道断除嗔,由阿罗汉道断除其余七种。巴利
Imāni pana kilesavatthūni kilesapaṭipāṭiyāpi āharituṃ vaṭṭati maggapaṭipāṭiyāpi. Kilesapaṭipāṭiyā lobho catūhi maggehi pahīyati, doso anāgāmimaggena, mohamānā arahattamaggena, diṭṭhivicikicchā sotāpattimaggena, thinādīni arahattamaggena. Maggapaṭipāṭiyā sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhivicikicchā pahīyanti, anāgāmimaggena doso, arahattamaggena sesā sattāti.
1287 在欲界的解说中,“下方”是指下面的部分。无间地狱:这里没有火焰之间的间隙,也没有众生之间的间隙,也没有苦受之间的间隙、空隙、裂缝,所以叫“无间”。这里没有被称为快乐的东西,所以叫“地狱”。也因为无乐之义和无滋味之义,所以叫“地狱”。“以……为边界”是指以那个叫无间的地狱作为边界。“上方”是指上面的部分。他化自在天:因为在他人所化的欲乐中自在支配,所以得到这样的名称,这样的天人就叫他化自在天。“纳入内部”是指把(他们)放进去。“凡在这个中间”是指凡在这个范围内。“此处行境者”:因为在这个范围内还有其他众生有时也在某处出现,为了不把那些众生包括进来,所以说了“行境者”。这样一来,那些在这个范围内深入而行的、在任何地方任何时候都存在的、在下方以无间地狱之下乃至以有分持续状态而行的众生,就被包括进来了。因为他们正是深入而行、正是在下方而行,所以叫“行境者”。而“此处所摄者”:因为这些此处行境者也会行于别处,但并不是属于别处,所以为了统摄那些也行于别处的众生而说了这个。现在,为了显示这些此处所摄的法,从蕴聚空性的因缘和自性两方面来说,所以说了“蕴”等。巴利
1287. Kāmāvacaraniddese heṭṭhatoti heṭṭhābhāgena. Avīcinirayanti vā aggijālānaṃ vā sattānaṃ vā dukkhavedanāya vīci, antaraṃ, chiddaṃ ettha natthīti avīci. Sukhasaṅkhāto ayo ettha natthīti nirayo. Niratiatthenapi nirassādatthenapi nirayo. Pariyantaṃ karitvāti taṃ avīcisaṅkhātaṃ nirayaṃ antaṃ katvā. Uparitoti uparibhāgena. Paranimmitavasavattideveti paranimmitesu kāmesu vasaṃ vattanato evaṃladdhavohāre deve. Anto karitvāti anto pakkhipitvā. Yaṃ etasmiṃ antareti ye etasmiṃ okāse. Etthāvacarāti iminā yasmā etasmiṃ antare aññepi caranti kadāci katthaci sambhavato, tasmā tesaṃ asaṅgaṇhanatthaṃ ‘avacarā’ti vuttaṃ. Tena ye etasmiṃ antare ogāḷhā hutvā caranti sabbattha sadā ca sambhavato, adhobhāge caranti avīcinirayassa heṭṭhā bhūtupādāyapavattibhāvena, tesaṃ saṅgaho kato hoti. Te hi avagāḷhāva caranti, adhobhāgeva carantīti avacarā. Ettha pariyāpannāti iminā pana yasmā ete etthāvacarā aññatthāpi avacaranti, na pana tattha pariyāpannā honti, tasmā tesaṃ aññatthāpi avacarantānaṃ pariggaho kato hoti. Idāni te ettha pariyāpannadhamme rāsisuññatapaccayabhāvato ceva sabhāvato ca dassento khandhātiādimāha.
1289 在色界部分的解说中,“梵天界”指的是称为初禅地的梵天住处。这里其余的内容,应当依照欲界解说中已经说过的方式来了知。在“已入定者”等句子中,第一句说的是善禅那,第二句说的是果报禅那,第三句说的是唯作禅那。巴利
1289. Rūpāvacaraniddese brahmalokanti paṭhamajjhānabhūmisaṅkhātaṃ brahmaṭṭhānaṃ. Sesamettha kāmāvacaraniddese vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Samāpannassa vātiādīsu paṭhamapadena kusalajjhānaṃ vuttaṃ, dutiyena vipākajjhānaṃ, vuttaṃ tatiyena kiriyajjhānaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
1291 在无色界的解说中,“空无边处生者”指的是已经投生到称为空无边处的那个存在境界。第二句也是同样的道理。剩下的内容,应当按照前面已经讲过的方式来理解。巴利
1291. Arūpāvacaraniddese ākāsānañcāyatanūpageti ākāsānañcāyatanasaṅkhātaṃ bhavaṃ upagate. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
1301 在“有依二法”的解说中,三不善根里的痴,如果和贪相应,就因为贪而成为有依;如果和嗔相应,就因为嗔而成为有依。但是,和疑、掉举相应的痴,因为与见相应的贪,以及被称为色贪、无色贪的贪染,在断除上是同一类,所以应当知道它是有依、有染。巴利
1301. Saraṇadukaniddese yvāyaṃ tīsu akusalamūlesu moho, so lobhasampayutto ca lobhena saraṇo, dosasampayutto ca dosena saraṇo. Vicikicchuddhaccasampayutto pana moho diṭṭhisampayuttena ceva rūparāgaarūparāgasaṅkhātena ca rāgaraṇena pahānekaṭṭhabhāvato saraṇo sarajoti veditabbo.
经教二法安立解说巴利
Suttantikadukanikkhepakathā
1303 在经教二法的论母解说中,因为已经从义理上做了辨析,而且那些解释文句也大多按照前面所说的方式就能很容易理解,所以基本上都是浅显易懂的。不过这里有一个特别之处:在“如电双”中,据说有一个眼力好的人,在乌云密布的夜里赶路。因为黑暗,道路看不见。闪电划出,驱散了黑暗。黑暗消失后,道路就变得清晰了。他第二次又出发前行。黑暗再次笼罩,道路看不见。闪电划出,驱散了它。黑暗消失后,道路又变得清晰了。他第三次又出发前行。黑暗笼罩,道路看不见。闪电划出,驱散了黑暗。巴利
1303. Suttantikadukesu mātikākathāyaṃ atthato vivecitattā yāni ca nesaṃ niddesapadāni tesampi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva suviññeyyattā yebhuyyena uttānatthāni eva. Idaṃ panettha visesamattaṃ – vijjūpamaduke tāva cakkhumā kira puriso meghandhakāre rattiṃ maggaṃ paṭipajji. Tassa andhakāratāya maggo na paññāyi. Vijju niccharitvā andhakāraṃ viddhaṃsesi. Athassa andhakāravigamā maggo pākaṭo ahosi. So dutiyampi gamanaṃ abhinīhari. Dutiyampi andhakāro otthari. Maggo na paññāyi. Vijju niccharitvā taṃ viddhaṃsesi. Vigate andhakāre maggo pākaṭo ahosi. Tatiyampi gamanaṃ abhinīhari. Andhakāro otthari. Maggo na paññāyi. Vijju niccharitvā andhakāraṃ viddhaṃsesi.
在这里,就像一个有眼睛的人在黑暗中走路,圣弟子为了证得入流道而开始修观。黑暗中看不见路,就像遮蔽四谛的黑暗。闪电划破黑暗、驱散黑暗的那一刻,就像入流道的光明生起、除掉了遮蔽四谛的黑暗。黑暗消失后路就清楚了,就像入流道让四谛变得清楚。而路的清楚,其实就是证得这条道的人自己清楚。第二次出发前行,就像为了证得一来道而开始修观。黑暗中看不见路,就像遮蔽四谛的黑暗。第二次闪电划破黑暗、驱散黑暗的那一刻,就像一来道的光明生起、除掉了遮蔽四谛的黑暗。黑暗消失后路就清楚了,就像一来道让四谛变得清楚。而路的清楚,其实就是证得这条道的人自己清楚。第三次出发前行,就像为了证得不还道而开始修观。黑暗中看不见路,就像遮蔽四谛的黑暗。第三次闪电划破黑暗、驱散黑暗的那一刻,就像不还道的光明生起、除掉了遮蔽四谛的黑暗。黑暗消失后路就清楚了,就像不还道让四谛变得清楚。而路的清楚,其实就是证得这条道的人自己清楚。巴利
Tattha cakkhumato purisassa andhakāre maggapaṭipajjanaṃ viya ariyasāvakassa sotāpattimaggatthāya vipassanārambho. Andhakāre maggassa apaññāyanakālo viya saccacchādakatamaṃ. Vijjuyā niccharitvā andhakārassa viddhaṃsitakālo viya sotāpattimaggobhāsena uppajjitvā saccacchādakatamassa vinoditakālo. Vigate andhakāre maggassa pākaṭakālo viya sotāpattimaggassa catunnaṃ saccānaṃ pākaṭakālo. Maggassa pākaṭaṃ pana maggasamaṅgipuggalassa pākaṭameva. Dutiyagamanābhinīhāro viya sakadāgāmimaggatthāya vipassanārambho. Andhakāre maggassa apaññāyanakālo viya saccacchādakatamaṃ. Dutiyaṃ vijjuyā niccharitvā andhakārassa viddhaṃsitakālo viya sakadāgāmimaggobhāsena uppajjitvā saccacchādakatamassa vinoditakālo. Vigate andhakāre maggassa pākaṭakālo viya sakadāgāmimaggassa catunnaṃ saccānaṃ pākaṭakālo. Maggassa pākaṭaṃ pana maggasamaṅgipuggalassa pākaṭameva. Tatiyagamanābhinīhāro viya anāgāmimaggatthāya vipassanārambho. Andhakāre maggassa apaññāyanakālo viya saccacchādakatamaṃ. Tatiyaṃ vijjuyā niccharitvā andhakārassa viddhaṃsitakālo viya anāgāmimaggobhāsena uppajjitvā saccacchādakatamassa vinoditakālo. Vigate andhakāre maggassa pākaṭakālo viya anāgāmimaggassa catunnaṃ saccānaṃ pākaṭakālo. Maggassa pākaṭaṃ pana maggasamaṅgipuggalassa pākaṭameva.
不过,对金刚来说,没有什么石头或宝珠是它不能击碎的。它落到哪里,哪里就被彻底穿透。金刚掷出去时,能把它所击之物摧毁得一点不剩。被金刚划过的地方,再也不会恢复原样。同样,对阿罗汉道来说,没有什么烦恼是它不能摧破的。它像金刚一样,穿透一切烦恼。阿罗汉道在断除烦恼时,也能把它们灭尽无余。就像被金刚划过的地方再也不会恢复原样,被阿罗汉道断除的烦恼,也再不会重新生起。巴利
Vajirassa pana pāsāṇo vā maṇi vā abhejjo nāma natthi. Yattha patati taṃ vinividdhameva hoti. Vajiraṃ khepentaṃ asesetvā khepeti. Vajirena gatamaggo nāma puna pākatiko na hoti. Evameva arahattamaggassa avajjhakileso nāma natthi. Sabbakilese vinivijjhati vajiraṃ viya. Arahattamaggopi kilese khepento asesetvā khepeti. Vajirena gatamaggassa puna pākatikattābhāvo viya arahattamaggena pahīnakilesānaṃ puna paccudāvattanaṃ nāma natthīti.
1307 在“愚者双”的解说中,对愚者来说,无惭和无愧是最明显的,它们也是其余愚者法的根本。因为一个无惭无愧的人,不会做任何不善。这两者首先被单独说明。在善分(白分)方面,也是同样的道理。在黑双中也是如此。巴利
1307.Bāladukaniddese bālesu ahirikānottappāni pākaṭāni, mūlāni ca sesānaṃ bāladhammānaṃ. Ahiriko hi anottappī ca na kiñci akusalaṃ na karoti nāmāti. Etāni dve paṭhamaṃyeva visuṃ vuttāni. Sukkapakkhepi ayameva nayo. Tathā kaṇhaduke.
1311 在“热恼双”的解说中,应当知道:热恼是因为已作和未作而产生的。身恶行等因为已经做了,所以令人热恼;身善行等因为没有做,所以令人热恼。就像一个人因为“我做了身恶行”而热恼,因为“我没做身善行”而热恼;因为“我做了语恶行”而热恼……乃至因为“我没做意善行”而热恼。非热恼方面也是同样的道理:行善的人不会因为“我做了身善行”而热恼,也不会因为“我没做身恶行”而热恼……乃至不会因为“我没做意恶行”而热恼。巴利
1311.Tapanīyadukaniddese katattā ca akatattā ca tapanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kāyaduccaritādīni hi katattā tapanti, kāyasucaritādīni akatattā. Tathā hi puggalo ‘kataṃ me kāyaduccarita’nti tappati, ‘akataṃ me kāyasucarita’nti tappati. ‘Kataṃ me vacīduccarita’nti tappati…pe… ‘akataṃ me manosucarita’nti tappati. Atapanīyepi eseva nayo. Kalyāṇakārī hi puggalo ‘kataṃ me kāyasucarita’nti na tappati, ‘akataṃ me kāyaduccarita’nti na tappati…pe… ‘akataṃ me manoduccarita’nti na tappatīti (a. ni. 2.3).
1313 在《增语双论》的解说中,“那些各种法”是指对一切法的统摄。被称为“称说”(saṅkhā),就是被共同言说的意思。怎样被共同言说呢?比如“我”“我的”“他”“他的”“众生”“有”“养育者”“人”“男子”“青年”“帝须”“达多”,以及“床、凳、褥、枕”“精舍、周围住处、门、窗”等,以种种方式被共同言说,所以叫“称说”。被称为“共称”(samaññā),就是被共同称呼的意思。怎样被共同称呼呢?如“我……乃至……窗”被共同称呼,所以叫“共称”。被称为“施设”(paññatti),就是被施设的意思。被称为“惯用语”(vohāra),就是被惯用的意思。怎样被惯用呢?如“我……乃至……窗”被惯用,所以叫“惯用语”。巴利
1313.Adhivacanadukaniddese yā tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānanti sabbadhammaggahaṇaṃ. Saṅkhāyatīti saṅkhā, saṃkathiyatīti attho. Kinti saṃkathiyati? Ahanti mamanti paroti parassāti sattoti bhāvoti posoti puggaloti naroti māṇavoti tissoti dattoti, ‘mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bimbohanaṃ’ ‘vihāro pariveṇaṃ dvāraṃ vātapāna’nti evaṃ anekehi ākārehi saṃkathiyatīti ‘saṅkhā’. Samaññāyatīti samaññā. Kinti samaññāyati? ‘Ahanti…pe… vātapāna’nti samaññāyatīti ‘samaññā’. Paññāpiyatīti paññatti. Vohariyatīti vohāro. Kinti vohariyati? ‘Aha’nti…pe… ‘vātapāna’nti vohariyatīti vohāro.
名有四种:共称名、功德名、假立名、随生名。其中,在最初劫时,由大众共同认可而确立,所以国王名为“大共许”,这就是“共称名”。对此经中说:“婆悉咤,因为大众共同认可,‘大共许’确实是最初产生的名称。”说法者、穿粪扫衣者、持律者、通达三藏者、有信仰者、清净信者——像这样由功德而来的名称,就是“功德名”。世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者等,如来的数百种名称,也都是功德名。因此说:巴利
Nāmanti catubbidhaṃ nāmaṃ – sāmaññanāmaṃ guṇanāmaṃ kittimanāmaṃ opapātikanāmanti. Tattha paṭhamakappikesu mahājanena sammannitvā ṭhapitattā mahāsammatoti rañño nāmaṃ ‘sāmaññanāmaṃ’ nāma. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘mahājanasammatoti kho, vāseṭṭha, mahāsammato tveva paṭhamaṃ akkharaṃ upanibbatta’’nti (dī. ni. 3.131). Dhammakathiko paṃsukūliko vinayadharo tepiṭako saddho pasannoti evarūpaṃ guṇato āgatanāmaṃ ‘guṇanāmaṃ’ nāma. Bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddhotiādīnipi tathāgatassa anekāni nāmasatāni guṇanāmāneva. Tena vuttaṃ –
大圣者具足功德,所以有无量名称。
依功德安立名称,纵有千名亦不为多。巴利
‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇena nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāmasahassato’’ti.
不过,当生下来的小孩在取名那天,亲戚们供养了应受供养的人之后,站在旁边,经过商量筹划,说“这个孩子叫某某”,然后给他取名字,这种叫做“假立名”。而如果先前的施设落到了后来的施设上,先前的叫法落到了后来的叫法上,比如:在前一劫中,月亮就叫月亮,现在也还是叫月亮;过去太阳……大海……大地……山就叫山,现在也还是叫山——这种叫做“随生名”。这里说的这四种名,在这里都只是名而已。巴利
Yaṃ pana jātassa kumārakassa nāmaggahaṇadivase dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ sakkāraṃ katvā samīpe ṭhitā ñātakā kappetvā pakappetvā ‘ayaṃ asukonāmā’ti nāmaṃ karonti, idaṃ ‘kittimanāma’ nāma. Yā pana purimapaññatti pacchimapaññattiyaṃ patati, purimavohāro pacchimavohāre patati, seyyathidaṃ – purimakappepi cando candoyeva nāma, etarahipi candova. Atīte sūriyo… samuddo… pathavī… pabbato pabbatoyeva, nāma, etarahipi pabbatoyevāti idaṃ ‘opapātikanāmaṃ’ nāma. Idaṃ catubbidhampi nāmaṃ ettha nāmameva hoti.
名业就是命名。名号就是安立名称。释词就是名称的解释。文句就是名称的文句。因为这东西能阐明含义,所以才这样说。称谓就是名称的称谓本身。一切法都是增语所行之道,也就是说,没有任何一法不是增语所行之道。一法落入一切法中,一切法落入一法中。怎么讲呢?这个名施设就是一法,它落入所有四地法中。即使是众生和诸行,也没有脱离名而存在的。巴利
Nāmakammanti nāmakaraṇaṃ. Nāmadheyyanti nāmaṭṭhapanaṃ. Niruttīti nāmanirutti. Byañjananti nāmabyañjanaṃ. Yasmā panetaṃ atthaṃ byañjeti tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Abhilāpoti nāmābhilāpova. Sabbeva dhammā adhivacanapathāti adhivacanassa nopathadhammo nāma natthi. Ekadhammo sabbadhammesu nipatati, sabbadhammā ekadhammasmiṃ nipatanti. Kathaṃ? Ayañhi nāmapaññatti ekadhammo, so sabbesu catubhūmakadhammesu nipatati. Sattopi saṅkhāropi nāmato muttako nāma natthi.
在森林、山地等地方,树木对当地人来说也是一种负担。因为他们被问到“这树叫什么名字”时,会说出自己知道的名称,比如“相思树”“紫荆树”。对于不知道名字的,他们就说“没名字”。那个也就成了它的名称而存在。海里的鱼、龟等也是如此。其余两对——名与名号、释词与文句——意义和这个是一样的。巴利
Aṭavīpabbatādīsu rukkhopi jānapadānaṃ bhāro. Te hi ‘ayaṃ kiṃ rukkho nāmā’ti puṭṭhā ‘khadiro’ ‘palāso’ti attanā jānanakanāmaṃ kathenti. Yassa nāmaṃ na jānanti tampi ‘anāmako’ nāmāti vadanti. Tampi tassa nāmadheyyameva hutvā tiṭṭhati. Samudde macchakacchapādīsupi eseva nayo. Itare dve dukā iminā samānatthā eva.
1316 在名色一对里,以命名之义、以朝向之义、以使朝向之义而称为“名”。其中,四种蕴首先以命名之义而成为“名”。譬如因为大众公认,大众认可者才有了“大众认可者”这个名;又如父母给儿子取一个约定的名字,说“让这个孩子名叫帝须,名叫弗沙吧”;又如从功德而得名“说法者”“持律者”。然而受等并不是这样。因为受等就像大地等一样,是自带其名而生起的。它们生起时,它们的名也就随之生起了。没有人会对已生起的受说“你要名叫受”,也没有为它命名的必要。正如大地生起时,没有为它命名的必要说“你要名叫大地”;轮围山、须弥山、月、日、星宿生起时,也没有为它们命名的必要说“你要名叫轮围山,你要名叫星宿”,名就随之生起,落入自然化生的概念施设中;同样,受生起时,没有为它命名的必要说“你要名叫受”,它一生起,“受”这个名就随之生起,落入自然化生的概念施设中。想等蕴也是同样的道理。因为过去的受就是受,想……行……识就是识;未来、现在也一样。至于涅槃,则始终就是涅槃。这就是以命名之义而成为“名”。巴利
1316.Nāmarūpaduke nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena ca namanaṭṭhena ca nāmanaṭṭhena ca nāmaṃ. Tattha cattāro khandhā tāva nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena ‘nāmaṃ’. Yathā hi mahājanasammatattā mahāsammatassa mahāsammatoti nāmaṃ ahosi, yathā vā mātāpitaro ‘ayaṃ tisso nāma hotu, phusso nāma hotū’ti evaṃ puttassa kittimanāmaṃ karonti, yathā vā ‘dhammakathiko’ ‘vinayadharo’ti guṇato nāmaṃ āgacchati, na evaṃ vedanādīnaṃ. Vedanādayo hi mahāpathavīādayo viya attano nāmaṃ karontāva uppajjanti. Tesu uppannesu tesaṃ nāmaṃ uppannameva hoti. Na hi vedanaṃ uppannaṃ ‘tvaṃ vedanā nāma hohī’ti koci bhaṇati. Na ca tassā nāmaggahaṇakiccaṃ atthi. Yathā pathaviyā uppannāya ‘tvaṃ pathavī nāma hohī’ti nāmaggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi, cakkavāḷasinerucandimasūriyanakkhattesu uppannesu ‘tvaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ nāma hohi tvaṃ nakkhattaṃ nāma hohī’ti nāmaggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi, nāmaṃ uppannameva hoti, opapātikapaññattiyaṃ nipatati, evaṃ vedanāya uppannāya ‘tvaṃ vedanā nāma hohī’ti nāmaggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Tāya uppannāya vedanāti nāmaṃ uppannameva hoti. Opapātikapaññattiyaṃ nipatati. Saññādīsupi eseva nayo. Atītepi hi vedanā vedanāyeva, saññā… saṅkhārā… viññāṇaṃ viññāṇameva. Anāgatepi, paccuppannepi. Nibbānaṃ pana sadāpi nibbānamevāti. ‘Nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena’ nāmaṃ.
在这里,四蕴也以“朝向”的意思而称为“名”,因为它们面向所缘而朝向。以“使朝向”的意思来说,一切法都是“名”:因为四蕴在所缘上互相使对方朝向;而涅槃则以所缘增上缘的力量,使无过失的诸法朝向自己。巴利
‘Namanaṭṭhenā’pi cettha cattāro khandhā nāmaṃ. Te hi ārammaṇābhimukhā namanti. ‘Nāmanaṭṭhena’ sabbampi nāmaṃ. Cattāro hi khandhā ārammaṇe aññamaññaṃ nāmenti. Nibbānaṃ ārammaṇādhipatipaccayatāya attani anavajjadhamme nāmeti.
1318 无明、有与渴爱这三样被举出来,是为了显示它们就是轮回的根本运作方式。巴利
1318. Avijjābhavataṇhā vaṭṭamūlasamudācāradassanatthaṃ gahitā.
1320 认为“我以及世间将会存在”,也就是把五蕴这个集合执取为“我以及世间”,以“它将会存在”的方式执取,这就是牢牢安住的常见。第二种,以“它将会不存在”的方式执取,这就是牢牢安住的断灭见。巴利
1320.Bhavissati attā ca loko cāti khandhapañcakaṃ attā ca loko cāti gahetvā ‘taṃ bhavissatī’ti gahaṇākārena niviṭṭhā sassatadiṭṭhi. Dutiyā ‘na bhavissatī’ti ākārena niviṭṭhā ucchedadiṭṭhi.
1326 '依于前际'是指把过去那一部分作为所缘。通过这句话,就涵盖了《梵网经》里讲到的十八种前际邪见。'依于后际'是指把未来那一部分作为所缘。通过这句话,就涵盖了同一部经里讲到的四十四种后际邪见。巴利
1326.Pubbantaṃārabbhāti atītakoṭṭhāsaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karitvā. Iminā brahmajāle āgatā aṭṭhārasa pubbantānudiṭṭhiyo gahitā. Aparantaṃ ārabbhāti anāgatakoṭṭhāsaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karitvā. Iminā tattheva āgatā catucattālīsa aparantānudiṭṭhiyo gahitā.
1332 在“难调教性”的解释中,“对同法者所说”是指:当有人指出世尊所制定的学处,举出具体事由,指出所犯的罪,然后对他说“你犯了这样的罪,来吧,发露、出罪、忏悔”时,他正在被这样说。
“难调教”等词中:当一个人这样被劝诫时,如果他以反劝诫或不肯顺从接受来回应,这种难调教的行为就是“难调教性”。那行为本身也叫“难调教”,它的状态就是“难调教性”。另一个词是它的同义词。
“违逆执取”就是反向执取。以违逆执取为特征的对抗状态,乐于此中者名为“乐于对抗”。“取了对抗的立场,一句话就让他安静下来”,这是对轻易获得安乐者的称呼。这种状态就是“乐于对抗性”。
以不纳受教诫为特征的不敬状态,就是“不敬”。另一个词是它的同义词。或者,不纳受的形态就是不敬重。
因不住于尊重而产生的不尊重状态,就是“不尊重”。因不住于尊长而产生的不听从状态,就是“不听从”。
这被称为——这样的难调教性就被称为“难调教性”。但从意义上看,它是以那种方式生起的四蕴,或者仅仅是行蕴。在“恶友”等词中也是同样的道理。因为难调教性、恶友等,并没有单独存在的心所法。巴利
1332. Dovacassatāniddese sahadhammike vuccamāneti sahadhammikaṃ nāma yaṃ bhagavatā paññattaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ, tasmiṃ vatthuṃ dassetvā āpattiṃ āropetvā ‘idaṃ nāma tvaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno, iṅgha desehi vuṭṭhāhi paṭikarohī’ti vuccamāne. Dovacassāyantiādīsu evaṃ codiyamānassa paṭicodanāya vā appadakkhiṇagāhitāya vā dubbacassa kammaṃ dovacassāyaṃ. Tadeva dovacassantipi vuccati. Tassa bhāvo dovacassiyaṃ. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Vippaṭikūlagāhitāti vilomagāhitā. Vilomagahaṇasaṅkhātena vipaccanīkena sātaṃ assāti vipaccanīkasāto. ‘Paṭāṇikagahaṇaṃ gahetvā ekapadeneva taṃ nissaddamakāsi’nti sukhaṃ paṭilabhantassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tassa bhāvo vipaccanīkasātatā. Ovādaṃ anādiyanavasena anādarassa bhāvo anādariyaṃ. Itaraṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anādiyanākāro vā anādaratā. Garuvāsaṃ avasanavasena uppanno agāravabhāvo agāravatā. Sajeṭṭhakavāsaṃ avasanavasena uppanno appaṭissavabhāvo appaṭissavatā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpā dovacassatā nāma vuccati. Atthato panesā tenākārena pavattā cattāro khandhā, saṅkhārakkhandhoyeva vāti. Pāpamittatādīsupi eseva nayo. Dovacassatā pāpamittatādayo hi visuṃ cetasikadhammā nāma natthi.
1333 1333. “无信”是指他们没有信,意思是他们不信佛等对象。“恶戒”是指戒的善名在他们那里不存在,也就是没有戒。“寡闻”是指缺乏听闻。“悭吝”是指他们有五种悭吝。“恶慧”是指没有慧。以亲近的方式称为“亲近”,以强力亲近的方式称为“依止”,以全方位亲近的方式称为“遍亲近”。或者,这是通过前缀使词义扩展,三者说的都是亲近。“交往”是指接近。“全面交往”是指全方位地交往,或者通过前缀使词义扩展。“爱敬”是指坚固的爱敬。“全面爱敬”是指全方位的爱敬,或者通过前缀使词义扩展。两者说的都是坚固的爱敬。“倾心于他们”是指在那些人的身上,身心两方面都倾心;意思是倾向于他们、朝向他们、归向他们。巴利
1333. Natthi etesaṃ saddhāti assaddhā; buddhādīni vatthūni na saddahantīti attho. Dussīlāti sīlassa dunnāmaṃ natthi, nissīlāti attho. Appassutāti sutarahitā. Pañca macchariyāni etesaṃ atthīti maccharino. Duppaññāti nippaññā. Sevanakavasena sevanā. Balavasevanā nisevanā. Sabbatobhāgena sevanā saṃsevanā. Upasaggavasena vā padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Tīhipi sevanāva kathitā. Bhajanāti upasaṅkamanā. Sambhajanāti sabbatobhāgena bhajanā. Upasaggavasena vā padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Bhattīti daḷhabhatti. Sambhattīti sabbatobhāgena bhatti. Upasaggavasena vā padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Dvīhipi daḷhabhatti eva kathitā. Taṃsampavaṅkatāti tesu puggalesu kāyena ceva cittena ca sampavaṅkabhāvo; tanninnatā tappoṇatā tappabbhāratāti attho.
1334 关于“易调教性”这一组的解释,也应该按照前面所说的相反方式来理解。巴利
1334. Sovacassatādukaniddesopi vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo.
1336 五罪聚,是指按照论母的解释所说的波罗夷、僧残、波逸提、波罗提提舍尼、恶作这五种罪。七罪聚,是指按照律的解释所说的波罗夷、僧残、偷兰遮、波逸提、波罗提提舍尼、恶作、恶说这七种罪。其中,连同事由一起,能了知这些罪各自界限的智慧,叫做罪巧。而连同羯磨语一起,能了知出罪界限的智慧,则叫做出罪巧。巴利
1336.Pañcapiāpattikkhandhāti mātikāniddesena ‘pārājikaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ pācittiyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ dukkaṭa’nti imā pañca āpattiyo. Sattapi āpattikkhandhāti vinayaniddesena ‘pārājikaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ thullaccayaṃ pācittiyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ dukkaṭaṃ dubbhāsita’nti imā satta āpattiyo. Tattha saha vatthunā tāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ paricchedajānanakapaññā āpattikusalatā nāma. Saha kammavācāya āpattivuṭṭhānaparicchedajānanakapaññā pana āpattivuṭṭhānakusalatā nāma.
1338 等至,是因为应当进入而称为等至。与加行一起,能了知安止的界限的智慧,就叫作等至善巧。比如心里决定“当月亮、太阳或星宿运行到某个位置时,我就出定”,到时候能毫无差错地在那个时刻出定,因为具有这种出定的智慧,就叫作等至出定善巧。巴利
1338. Samāpajjitabbato samāpatti. Saha parikammena appanāparicchedajānanakapaññā pana samāpattikusalatā nāma. ‘Cande vā sūriye vā nakkhatte vā ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ gate vuṭṭhahissāmī’ti avirajjhitvā tasmiṃyeva samaye vuṭṭhānakapaññāya atthitāya samāpattivuṭṭhānakusalatā nāma.
1340 对十八界的掌握、作意、听闻、受持、判别、了知的智慧,叫做界善巧。对同样这些界的掌握、作意、了知的智慧,叫做作意善巧。巴利
1340. Aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ uggahamanasikārasavanadhāraṇaparicchedajānanakapaññā dhātukusalatā nāma. Tāsaṃyeva uggahamanasikārajānanakapaññā manasikārakusalatā nāma.
1342 对十二处的学习、作意、听闻、受持、区分、了知的智慧,叫做“处巧”。或者,在这三种善巧当中,学习、作意、听闻、观察、通达、省察——这一切都适用。其中,听闻、学习和省察属于世间,通达属于出世间,观察和作意则世间与出世间都有。“无明缘行”等,将在缘起分别中详细说明。了知“由于这个缘,所以有这个”的智慧,叫做“缘起巧”。巴利
1342. Dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ uggahamanasikārasavanadhāraṇaparicchedajānanakapaññā latā nāma. Tīsupi vā etāsu kusalatāsu uggaho manasikāro savanaṃ sammasanaṃ paṭivedho paccavekkhaṇāti sabbaṃ vaṭṭati. Tattha savanauggahapaccavekkhaṇā lokiyā, paṭivedho lokuttaro. Sammasanamanasikārā lokiyalokuttaramissakā. ‘Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’tiādīni (vibha. aṭṭha. 225) paṭiccasamuppādavibhaṅge āvibhavissanti. ‘Iminā pana paccayena idaṃ hotī’ti jānanakapaññā paṭiccasamuppādakusalatā nāma.
1344 在“处非处善巧”这一对法的解释中,“因”和“缘”这两个词其实是同一个意思的不同说法。因为眼净色以色为所缘,使眼识得以生起,所以它既是因也是缘。同样地,耳净色等对于耳识等、芒果种子等对于芒果果实等,也是如此。在第二种方式中,“哪些法”是在举例说明属于不同类别的缘法;“对于哪些”是在举例说明由不同类别的缘所生起的法。“非因非缘”是指:眼净色以声音为所缘而使耳识生起,这就既不是因也不是缘。同样地,耳净色等对于其余各种识等、芒果等对于棕榈等的生起,也是如此。应当这样理解其中的含义。巴利
1344. Ṭhānāṭṭhānakusalatādukaniddese hetū paccayāti ubhayampetaṃ aññamaññavevacanaṃ. Cakkhupasādo hi rūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjanakassa cakkhuviññāṇassa hetu ceva paccayo ca. Tathā sotapasādādayo sotaviññāṇādīnaṃ, ambabījādīni ca ambaphalādīnaṃ. Dutiyanaye ye ye dhammāti visabhāgapaccayadhammānaṃ nidassanaṃ. Yesaṃ yesanti visabhāgapaccayasamuppannadhammanidassanaṃ. Na hetū na paccayāti cakkhupasādo saddaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjanakassa sotaviññāṇassa na hetu na paccayo. Tathā sotapasādādayo avasesaviññāṇādīnaṃ. Ambādayo ca tālādīnaṃ uppattiyāti evamattho veditabbo.
1346 在解释“正直”和“柔和”这两项时,“心谦下性”这个说法只是名称上的区别而已。它的意思是:因为没有慢,心就谦下,所以叫“心谦下”;心谦下的状态,就是“心谦下性”。至于其余的心正直性和心柔和性,在分别解释词语的部分里已经讲过了。巴利
1346. Ajjavamaddavaniddese nīcacittatāti padamattameva viseso. Tassattho – mānābhāvena nīcaṃ cittaṃ assāti nīcacitto. Nīcacittassa bhāvo nīcacittatā. Sesaṃ cittujukatācittamudutānaṃ padabhājanīye āgatameva.
1348 在“忍”的解释中,能忍的样态就是忍。忍的形态,就是忍性。人们以这种忍来承受,把它放在自己身上而安住,不抗拒,不站在对立面,这就叫安忍性。不暴躁的状态,就是不暴躁性。不粗恶:所谓粗恶语,是因为没有妥善安立。与它相反的就是不粗恶,也就是善妙语,这是这里的含义。这样一来,这里是通过果来指称因。心满意足:指以喜悦之心而使心自我满足,是心自身的状态,而不是被嗔恨染污的心,这就是其含义。巴利
1348. Khantiniddese khamanakavasena khanti. Khamanākāro khamanatā. Adhivāsenti etāya, attano upari āropetvā vāsenti, na paṭibāhanti, na paccanīkatāya tiṭṭhantīti adhivāsanatā. Acaṇḍikassa bhāvo acaṇḍikkaṃ. Anasuropoti asuropo vuccati na sammāropitattā duruttavacanaṃ. Tappaṭipakkhato anasuropo suruttavācāti attho. Evamettha phalūpacārena kāraṇaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ. Attamanatā cittassāti somanassavasena cittassa sakamanatā, attano cittasabhāvoyeva, na byāpannacittatāti attho.
1349 在“调伏”的解释中:身不违犯,指三种身善行;语不违犯,指四种语善行。“身与语不违犯”这句话,涵盖了由身门和语门生起的活命第八戒。这就称为调伏——因为从恶法中善巧地远离,所以称为调伏。“一切戒律防护”:之所以这样说,是因为众生不仅以身和语行非道,也会以意行非道,所以为了涵盖并说明意戒而说了这句话。巴利
1349. Soraccaniddese kāyiko avītikkamoti tividhaṃ kāyasucaritaṃ. Vācasiko avītikkamoti catubbidhaṃ vacīsucaritaṃ. Kāyikavācasikoti iminā kāyavacīdvārasamuṭṭhitaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ pariyādiyati. Idaṃ vuccati soraccanti idaṃ pāpato suṭṭhu oratattā soraccaṃ nāma vuccati. Sabbopi sīlasaṃvaroti idaṃ yasmā na kevalaṃ kāyavācāheva anācāraṃ ācarati manasāpi ācarati eva, tasmā mānasikasīlaṃ pariyādāya dassetuṃ vuttaṃ.
1350 在“柔和语”的解释中,“有疣”是说:就像有病的树上会长出疣瘤一样,同样,由于语有过失,用轻蔑、辱骂等言语就生出疣瘤。“粗涩”是指腐坏,就像腐坏的树粗糙、流出粉末一样,这种话也粗涩,像摩擦耳孔一样进入,所以说“粗涩”。“对他辛辣”是指对他人辛辣、不可意、引起嗔恼。“对他缠缚”是指像弯曲的荆棘枝刺入皮肤一样,对他人缠缚,即使想走也走不了,造成黏着。“近于嗔”是指接近嗔怒。“不引向定”是指不引向安止定或近行定。以上这些都是有过失言语的同义词。“舍离如是之语”这句是为了说明:没有断除粗恶语而住的人,其间即使生起柔和语,也根本不是柔和语。巴利
1350. Sākhalyaniddese aṇḍakāti yathā sadose rukkhe aṇḍakāni uṭṭhahanti, evaṃ sadosatāya khuṃsanavambhanādivacanehi aṇḍakā jātā. Kakkasāti pūtikā sā yathā nāma pūtirukkho kakkaso hoti paggharitacuṇṇo evaṃ kakkasā hoti. Sotaṃ ghaṃsayamānā viya pavisati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘kakkasā’ti. Parakaṭukāti paresaṃ kaṭukā amanāpā dosajananī. Parābhisajjanīti kuṭilakaṇṭakasākhā viya cammesu vijjhitvā paresaṃ abhisajjanī, gantukāmānampi gantuṃ adatvā lagganakārī. Kodhasāmantāti kodhassa āsannā. Asamādhisaṃvattanikāti appanāsamādhissa vā upacārasamādhissa vā asaṃvattanikā. Iti sabbānevetāni sadosavācāya vevacanāni. Tathārūpiṃ vācaṃ pahāyāti idaṃ pharusavācaṃ appajahitvā ṭhitassa antarantare pavattāpi saṇhavācā asaṇhavācā eva nāmāti dīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.
“无过失”:“过失”指的是嗔。没有过失,就是“无过失”,意思是离于嗔。就像“无过失之肢、白色覆盖”这句话里所说的“无过失”一样。“悦耳”:因为言辞甜美,所以让耳朵感到舒服,不会像针刺那样造成耳朵的刺痛。“可爱”:因为意义甜美,不会让身体生起恼怒,只会让人生起喜爱,所以叫“可爱”。“入心”:没有抵触,愉快地进入心中,所以叫“入心”。“城市语”:因为功德圆满,所以是“城市里有的”,叫“城市语”。就像在城市里长大的女子那样柔和,所以也叫“城市语”。或者说,这是属于城市的,也就是城市居民的说法。城市居民说话确实得体,称父亲为“父亲”,称兄弟为“兄弟”。这样的话为众人所喜爱,所以叫“众人喜爱”。正因为令人喜爱,所以让众人觉得可意、使心生欢喜,因此叫“众人可意”。其中,“对此人而言”就是“对那个人而言”。“柔和语性”就是温和语性,“亲切语性”就是柔软语性,“不粗恶语性”就是不粗硬语性。巴利
Neḷāti eḷaṃ vuccati doso. Nāssā eḷanti neḷā; niddosāti attho. ‘‘Neḷaṅgo setapacchādo’’ti (udā. 65; saṃ. ni. 4.347; peṭako. 25) ettha vuttaneḷaṃ viya. Kaṇṇasukhāti byañjanamadhuratāya kaṇṇānaṃ sukhā, sūcivijjhanaṃ viya kaṇṇasūlaṃ na janeti. Atthamadhuratāya sarīre kopaṃ ajanetvā pemaṃ janetīti pemanīyā. Hadayaṃ gacchati, appaṭihaññamānā sukhena cittaṃ pavisatīti hadayaṅgamā. Guṇaparipuṇṇatāya pure bhavāti porī. Pure saṃvaḍḍhanārī viya sukumārātipi porī. Purassa esātipi porī; nagaravāsīnaṃ kathāti attho. Nagaravāsino hi yuttakathā honti. Pitimattaṃ pitāti bhātimattaṃ bhātāti vadanti. Evarūpī kathā bahuno janassa kantā hotīti bahujanakantā. Kantabhāveneva bahuno janassa manāpā cittavuḍḍhikarāti bahujanamanāpā. Yā tatthāti yā tasmiṃ puggale. Saṇhavācatāti maṭṭhavācatā. Sakhilavācatāti muduvācatā. Apharusavācatāti akakkhaḷavācatā.
1351 在“摄益”的解说中,“财摄益”是指:由于得不到财物,自己与他人的裂缝得以覆盖、隐藏,这样以财物来行摄益。“法摄益”是指:由于得不到法,自己与他人的裂缝得以覆盖、隐藏,这样以法来行摄益。“成为摄益者”:世间共同生活确实只有这两种裂缝,他就是针对这两种裂缝而成为摄益者。以财摄益或以法摄益:就是由这两种摄益而成为摄益者,行摄益,使之无间断。巴利
1351. Paṭisanthāraniddese āmisapaṭisanthāroti āmisaalābhena attanā saha paresaṃ chiddaṃ yathā pihitaṃ hoti paṭicchannaṃ evaṃ āmisena paṭisantharaṇaṃ. Dhammapaṭisanthāroti dhammassa appaṭilābhena attanā saha paresaṃ chiddaṃ yathā pihitaṃ hoti paṭicchannaṃ, evaṃ dhammena paṭisantharaṇaṃ. Paṭisanthārako hotīti dveyeva hi lokasannivāsassa chiddāni, tesaṃ paṭisanthārako hoti. Āmisapaṭisanthārena vā dhammapaṭisanthārena vāti iminā duvidhena paṭisanthārena paṭisanthārako hoti, paṭisantharati, nirantaraṃ karoti.
这里从头开始讲:一位懂得待人接物的比丘,一看见有客比丘来了,就应该迎上前去,接过他的衣钵,给他安排座位,用扇子给他扇风,帮他洗脚、涂油;如果有酥油、糖蜜之类的,就应当拿给他当药;还要问他需不需要喝水,并帮他收拾好住处。这样,就算是做到了一部分的财物上的接待。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya kathā – paṭisanthārakena hi bhikkhunā āgantukaṃ āgacchantaṃ disvāva paccuggantvā pattacīvaraṃ gahetabbaṃ, āsanaṃ dātabbaṃ, tālavaṇṭena bījitabbaṃ, pādā dhovitvā makkhetabbā, sappiphāṇite sati bhesajjaṃ dātabbaṃ, pānīyena pucchitabbo, āvāso paṭijaggitabbo. Evaṃ ekadesena āmisapaṭisanthāro kato nāma hoti.
傍晚时,即使对方是较晚出家的比丘,也不必等到轮到自己侍奉的时候,就可以先到他那里去,坐下之后,不要问超出他能力范围的问题,而要在他擅长的范围内提问。不要问“您是诵持哪部经典的”,而应问“您的戒师、教授师是依哪部经典修学的”,然后在他能够回答的范围内提问。如果他能解说,那很好;如果不能,就自己为他解说。这样就算是做了法方面的部分摄受。巴利
Sāyaṃ pana navakatarepi attano upaṭṭhānaṃ anāgateyeva, tassa santikaṃ gantvā nisīditvā avisaye apucchitvā tassa visaye pañho pucchitabbo. ‘Tumhe katarabhāṇakā’ti apucchitvā tumhākaṃ ‘ācariyupajjhāyā kataraṃ ganthaṃ vaḷañjentī’ti pucchitvā pahonakaṭṭhāne pañho pucchitabbo. Sace kathetuṃ sakkoti iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce sakkoti sayaṃ kathetvā dātabbaṃ. Evaṃ ekadesena dhammapaṭisanthāro kato nāma hoti.
如果他就住在自己附近,就应该经常带着他一起去乞食。如果他想离开,第二天就顺着他要去的方向,带他到某个村子里一起乞食,然后送他走。如果另一个方向有比丘们受到邀请,而这位比丘也想去,就应该带他一起去。如果他说“那个方向跟我不合适”,不愿意去,就派其他比丘去,自己带着他去乞食。自己得到的食物应该分给他。这样就算是做到了以食物摄受。巴利
Sace attano santike vasati taṃ ādāya nibaddhaṃ piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ. Sace gantukāmo hoti punadivase gamanasabhāgena taṃ ādāya ekasmiṃ gāme piṇḍāya caritvā uyyojetabbo. Sace aññasmiṃ disābhāge bhikkhū nimantitā honti taṃ bhikkhuṃ icchamānaṃ ādāya gantabbaṃ. ‘Na mayhaṃ esā disā sabhāgā’ti gantuṃ anicchante sesabhikkhū pesetvā taṃ ādāya piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ. Attanā laddhāmisaṃ tassa dātabbaṃ. Evaṃ ‘āmisapaṭisanthāro’ kato nāma hoti.
那么,用财物来待人接物的人,自己得到的东西应该给谁呢?首先应该给新来的客人。如果有生病的人,或者有需要照顾的人,也应该给他们。应该给戒师和教授师。应该给帮忙拿东西的人。而用可尊敬的法来待人接物的人,即使来了一百次一千次,也应该从长老的座位开始,依次给每一个来的人。而用一般方式待人接物的人,谁没得到,就应该给谁。走出村子以后,如果看到年老的人、无依无靠的比丘或比丘尼,也应该给他们。巴利
Āmisapaṭisanthārakena pana attanā laddhaṃ kassa dātabbanti? Āgantukassa tāva dātabbaṃ. Sace gilāno vā avassiko vā atthi, tesampi dātabbaṃ. Ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ dātabbaṃ. Bhaṇḍagāhakassa dātabbaṃ. Sārāṇīyadhammapūrakena pana satavārampi sahassavārampi āgatāgatānaṃ therāsanato paṭṭhāya dātabbaṃ. Paṭisanthārakena pana yena yena na laddhaṃ, tassa tassa dātabbaṃ. Bahigāmaṃ nikkhamitvā jiṇṇakaṃ vā anāthaṃ bhikkhuṃ vā bhikkhuniṃ vā disvā tesampi dātabbaṃ.
这里有一件事:据说,盗贼袭击护法村的时候,一位刚从灭尽定出来的漏尽长老尼,立刻让一位年轻比丘尼带上她的东西,和众人一起上路。正午时分,她到了鼬鼠城的村门口,在一棵树下坐下来。那时,住在黑蔓藤凉亭的大那伽长老在鼬鼠城托钵后出来,看见长老尼,就用食物问候她。她说:我没有钵。长老说:就用这个吃吧。说着连钵一起给了她。长老尼吃完饭,洗了钵,还给长老,说:今天您托钵辛苦了,但从今以后,你们不会再为托钵而苦恼了,贤友。从那时起,长老的托钵食再也没有少于一个钱的价值。这叫作财物摄益。巴利
Tatridaṃ vatthu – corehi kira guttasālagāme pahate taṅkhaṇaññeva ekā nirodhato vuṭṭhitā khīṇāsavattherī daharabhikkhuniyā bhaṇḍakaṃ gāhāpetvā mahājanena saddhiṃ maggaṃ paṭipajjitvā ṭhitamajjhanhike nakulanagaragāmadvāraṃ patvā rukkhamūle nisīdi. Tasmiṃ samaye kāḷavallimaṇḍapavāsī mahānāgatthero nakulanagaragāme piṇḍāya caritvā nikkhanto theriṃ disvā bhattena āpucchi. Sā ‘patto me natthī’ti āha. Thero ‘imināva bhuñjathā’ti saha pattena adāsi. Therī bhattakiccaṃ katvā pattaṃ dhovitvā therassa datvā āha – ‘ajja tāva bhikkhācārena kilamissatha, ito paṭṭhāya pana vo bhikkhācāraparittāso nāma na bhavissati, tātā’ti. Tato paṭṭhāya therassa ūnakahāpaṇagghanako piṇḍapāto nāma na uppannapubbo. Ayaṃ ‘āmisapaṭisanthāro’ nāma.
做了这样的摄益之后,比丘应当站在摄受的一方,为那位比丘讲说业处,教授法义,消除疑虑,处理已生起的事务,应当给予出罪、别住、敬悦等。应当让适合出家的人出家,让适合受具足戒的人受具足戒。如果有比丘尼希望在自己面前受具足戒,为她作羯磨语也是可以的。这称为法摄益。巴利
Imaṃ paṭisanthāraṃ katvā bhikkhunā saṅgahapakkhe ṭhatvā tassa bhikkhuno kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetabbaṃ, dhammo vācetabbo, kukkuccaṃ vinodetabbaṃ, uppannaṃ kiccaṃ karaṇīyaṃ kātabbaṃ, abbhānavuṭṭhānamānattaparivāsā dātabbā. Pabbajjāraho pabbājetabbo upasampadāraho upasampādetabbo. Bhikkhuniyāpi attano santike upasampadaṃ ākaṅkhamānāya kammavācaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Ayaṃ ‘dhammapaṭisanthāro’ nāma.
比丘用这两种摄益,能让还没得到的利养生起,让已经得到的利养保持稳固,在危险的地方保护自己的性命,就像那位长老在盗贼和恶王面前,只用钵沿接食、用手抓钵那样。至于让未得利养生起,应当讲大那伽王逃到对岸,在一位长老跟前得到摄受,后来又回来登上王位,在白石广场一辈子做大药布施的故事。至于让已得利养保持稳固,应当讲长部诵者无畏长老得到摄益后,在支提山被贼人抢劫时,他的东西没有被抢走的故事。巴利
Imehi dvīhi paṭisanthārehi paṭisanthārako bhikkhu anuppannaṃ lābhaṃ uppādeti, uppannaṃ thāvaraṃ karoti, sabhayaṭṭhāne attano jīvitaṃ rakkhati coranāgarañño pattaggahaṇahattheneva aggaṃ gahetvā patteneva bhattaṃ ākiranto thero viya. Aladdhalābhuppādane pana ito palāyitvā paratīraṃ gatena mahānāgaraññā ekassa therassa santike saṅgahaṃ labhitvā puna āgantvā rajje patiṭṭhitena setambaṅgaṇe yāvajīvaṃ pavattitaṃ mahābhesajjadānavatthu kathetabbaṃ. Uppannalābhathāvarakaraṇe dīghabhāṇakaabhayattherassa hatthato paṭisanthāraṃ labhitvā cetiyapabbate corehi bhaṇḍakassa aviluttabhāve vatthu kathetabbaṃ.
1352 1352. 在“于诸根不防护门”的解说中,“以眼见色”是:以因眼而得名、具足见色能力的眼识见色。然而古德们说:“眼不见色,因为它没有心;心不见色,因为它没有眼;而是通过门与所缘的接触,以依于净色处的心来看。这种说法,就像‘以弓射’等说法一样,是带有工具词的表述。因此,这里的意思是‘以眼识见色’。”这就是此处的含义。“取总相”:就是执取男相、女相或净相等作为烦恼所依的总相,以欲贪去执取它,不满足于仅仅看见。“取细相”:就是执取那些能使烦恼显现出来的细相,即手、足、笑、语、顾、视等种种行相,这些被称为细相。“以此因缘……”等句中:由于什么原因,对于什么人,这些贪欲等法会追逐、跟随、淹没那个不依念门防护眼根、不关闭眼门而住的人。“不为其防护而行”:就是为了以念门关闭眼根而不去修习。如此便称为不守护眼根、于眼根不防护。巴利
1352. Indriyesu aguttadvāratāniddese cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti kāraṇavasena cakkhūti laddhavohārena rūpadassanasamatthena cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ disvā. Porāṇā panāhu – ‘‘cakkhu rūpaṃ na passati, acittakattā; cittaṃ na passati, acakkhukattā; dvārārammaṇasaṅghaṭṭanena pana pasādavatthukena cittena passati. Īdisī panesā ‘dhanunā vijjatī’tiādīsu viya sasambhārakathā nāma hoti. Tasmā cakkhuviññāṇena rūpaṃ disvā’’ti ayamevettha atthoti. Nimittaggāhīti itthipurisanimittaṃ vā subhanimittādikaṃ vā kilesavatthubhūtaṃ nimittaṃ chandarāgavasena gaṇhāti, diṭṭhamatteyeva na saṇṭhāti. Anubyañjanaggāhīti kilesānaṃ anubyañjanato pākaṭabhāvakaraṇato anubyañjananti laddhavohāraṃ hatthapādasitahasitakathitaālokitavilokitādibhedaṃ ākāraṃ gaṇhāti. Yatvādhikaraṇamenantiādimhi yaṃkāraṇā yassa cakkhundriyāsaṃvarassa hetu, etaṃ puggalaṃ satikavāṭena cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutaṃ apihitacakkhudvāraṃ hutvā viharantaṃ ete abhijjhādayo dhammā anvāssaveyyuṃ anubandheyyuṃ ajjhotthareyyuṃ. Tassa saṃvarāya na paṭipajjatīti tassa cakkhundriyassa satikavāṭena pidahanatthāya na paṭipajjati. Evaṃbhūtoyeva ca na rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, na cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatīti vuccati.
在这里,虽然眼根上并没有所谓的防护或不防护,因为依靠眼净色并不会生起正念或失念。但是,当色所缘进入眼的范围时,有分心识生灭两次之后,执行转向作用的唯作意界生起并灭去。接着,眼识执行看的作用;接着,异熟意界执行领受的作用;接着,异熟无因意识界执行推度的作用;接着,唯作无因意识界执行确定的作用,如此生起并灭去。紧接着,速行心开始运作。在这里,不论是在有分的时刻,还是在转向等任何一个时刻,都没有防护或不防护。然而在速行的刹那,如果生起了破戒、失念、无智、不能忍或懈怠,那就是不防护。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi cakkhundriye saṃvaro vā asaṃvaro vā natthi, na hi cakkhupasādaṃ nissāya sati vā muṭṭhassaccaṃ vā uppajjati. Apica yadā rūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhussa āpāthamāgacchati tadā bhavaṅge dvikkhattuṃ uppajjitvā niruddhe kiriyamanodhātu āvajjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā uppajjitvā nirujjhati. Tato cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccaṃ, tato vipākamanodhātu sampaṭicchanakiccaṃ, tato vipākāhetukamanoviññāṇadhātu santīraṇakiccaṃ, tato kiriyāhetukamanoviññāṇadhātu voṭṭhabbanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā uppajjitvā nirujjhati. Tadanantaraṃ javanaṃ javati. Tatrāpi neva bhavaṅgasamaye na āvajjanādīnaṃ aññatarasamaye saṃvaro vā asaṃvaro vā atthi. Javanakkhaṇe pana dussīlyaṃ vā muṭṭhassaccaṃ vā aññāṇaṃ vā akkhanti vā kosajjaṃ vā uppajjati, asaṃvaro hoti.
虽然如此,这个人还是被称为“在眼根上没有防护”。为什么?因为当这种不防护存在时,门也没有被守护,有分也没有被守护,转向等路心也没有被守护。就像什么呢?就像一座城邑的四座城门没有关闭时,即使里面的内宅、门楼、内室等都关得很严,城里所有的财物仍然是没有被守护、没有得到保护的。因为盗贼从城门进来后,就能为所欲为。同样地,当速行心中生起恶戒等时,由于这种不防护存在,门也没有被守护,有分也没有被守护,转向等路心也没有被守护。巴利
Evaṃ honto pana so ‘cakkhundriye asaṃvaro’ti vuccati. Kasmā? Yasmā tasmiṃ asaṃvare sati dvārampi aguttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi, āvajjanādīnipi vīthicittāni. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā nagare catūsu dvāresu asaṃvutesu kiñcāpi antogharadvārakoṭṭhakagabbhādayo susaṃvutā, tathāpi antonagare sabbaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ arakkhitaṃ agopitameva hoti. Nagaradvārena hi pavisitvā corā yadicchakaṃ kareyyuṃ. Evameva javane dussīlyādīsu uppannesu tasmiṃ asaṃvare sati dvārampi aguttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi, āvajjanādīnipi vīthicittānīti.
“以耳闻声”等句里,道理也是这样。“这些……根”:对于不这样守持这六根的人,这六根的不关闭、不遮蔽、不看守、不约束,就是不关闭、不遮挡的意思。巴利
Sotena saddaṃ sutvātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Yā imesanti evaṃ saṃvaraṃ anāpajjantassa imesaṃ channaṃ indriyānaṃ yā agutti yā agopanā yo anārakkho yo asaṃvaro, athakanaṃ, apidahananti attho.
1353 在“饮食不知量”的解说中,“这里有些人”指的是这个有情世界中的某一些人。“不加简择”是指不以简择的智慧了知、不加以考量。“不如理”是指用不正确的方式。“食物”是指所吃、所喝等需要吞咽的东西。“吃”是指受用、吞咽。“为了嬉戏等”是为了说明不正确的方式。因为用不正确的方式吃东西的人,是为了嬉戏、为了陶醉、为了打扮、为了装饰而吃,不是为了这个身体的需要。其中“不满足的状态”是指在那种不如理的饮食受用中不满足、不知足。“不知量”是指不知量的状态,即不知道所谓的量、不知道限度。这种因为不省察而受用所生起的饮食不知量,就称为“饮食不知量”。巴利
1353. Bhojane amattaññutāniddese idhekaccoti imasmiṃ sattaloke ekacco. Appaṭisaṅkhāti paṭisaṅkhānapaññāya ajānitvā anupadhāretvā. Ayonisoti anupāyena. Āhāranti asitapītādiajjhoharaṇīyaṃ. Āhāretīti paribhuñjati ajjhoharati. Davāyātiādi anupāyadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Anupāyena hi āhārento davatthāya madatthāya maṇḍanatthāya vibhūsanatthāya vā āhāreti, no idamatthitaṃ paṭicca. Yā tattha asantuṭṭhitāti yā tasmiṃ ayoniso āhāraparibhoge asantussanā asantuṭṭhibhāvo. Amattaññutāti amattaññubhāvo, pamāṇasaṅkhātāya mattāya ajānanaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ apaccavekkhitaparibhogavasena pavattā bhojane amattaññutā nāma vuccati.
1354 在“守护诸根门”的解说中,“以眼……”等句应当依照前面所说的方式理解。“不执取相”是指不因贪欲而执取前面所说的那种相。其余各句也应当依照前面所说的相反方式理解。就像前面说过的:“当速行心中生起恶戒等时,由于那种不防护,门也没有被守护,有分心也没有被守护,转向等路心也没有被守护。”同样地,在这里,当戒等生起时,门也被守护,有分心也被守护,转向等路心也被守护。这是什么意思呢?譬如城门严密关闭时,虽然城内的房屋等没有另外设防,但城内所有财物仍然被妥善守护、严密保护——因为城门关闭了,盗贼就进不来——同样地,当速行心中生起戒等时,门也被守护,有分心也被守护,转向等路心也被守护。因此,即使在速行刹那中生起的,也被称为“于眼根防护”。“以耳闻声后”等句也应当依照同样的道理理解。巴利
1354. Indriyesu guttadvāratāniddese cakkhunātiādi vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Na nimittaggāhī hotīti chandarāgavasena vuttappakāraṃ nimittaṃ na gaṇhāti. Evaṃ sesapadānipi vuttapaṭipakkhanayeneva veditabbāni. Yathā ca heṭṭhā ‘javane dussīlyādīsu uppannesu tasmiṃ asaṃvare sati, dvārampi aguttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi, āvajjanādīnipi vīthicittānī’ti vuttaṃ, evamidha tasmiṃ sīlādīsu uppannesu dvārampi guttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi, āvajjanādīnipi vīthicittāni. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā nagaradvāresu susaṃvutesu, kiñcāpi antogharādayo asaṃvutā honti, tathāpi antonagare sabbaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ surakkhitaṃ sugopitameva hoti – nagaradvāresu pihitesu corānaṃ paveso natthi – evameva javane sīlādīsu uppannesu dvārampi guttaṃ hoti, bhavaṅgampi, āvajjanādīnipi vīthicittāni. Tasmā javanakkhaṇe uppajjamānopi ‘cakkhundriye saṃvaro’ti vutto. Sotena saddaṃ sutvātiādīsupi eseva nayo.
1355 在“饮食知量”的解说中,“如理省思而食”是指:以省察的智慧了知之后,用正确的方式受用食物。现在为了说明这种正确的方式,说出了“不为嬉戏”等话。巴利
1355. Bhojane mattaññutāniddese paṭisaṅkhā yoniso āhāraṃ āhāretīti paṭisaṅkhānapaññāya jānitvā upāyena āhāraṃ paribhuñjati. Idāni taṃ upāyaṃ dassetuṃ neva davāyātiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,“不为嬉戏”的意思是不为了嬉戏而吃。其中,舞者、跳艺人等,才算是为了嬉戏而吃。因为吃了某种食物之后,由舞蹈、歌唱、诗词、偈颂等构成的嬉戏会显得更加起劲,他们以非法、不正当的方式寻求那种食物来吃。但这位比丘不这样吃。巴利
Tattha ‘neva davāyā’ti davatthāya na āhāreti. Tattha naṭalaṅghakādayo davatthāya āhārenti nāma. Yañhi bhojanaṃ bhuttassa naccagītakabyasilokasaṅkhāto davo atirekatarena paṭibhāti, taṃ bhojanaṃ adhammena visamena pariyesitvā te āhārenti. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu evaṃ na āhāreti.
“不为陶醉”是指:不是为了增长我慢、陶醉和男子气概的陶醉而吃东西。在这里,国王、大臣等人就是所谓为了陶醉而吃的人。他们为了增长自己的我慢、陶醉和男子气概的陶醉,而享用团食、珍馐等上等食物。但这位比丘不是这样吃的。巴利
Namadāyāti mānamadapurisamadānaṃ vaḍḍhanatthāya na āhāreti. Tattha rājarājamahāmattā madatthāya āhārenti nāma. Te hi attano mānamadapurisamadānaṃ vaḍḍhanatthāya piṇḍarasabhojanādīni paṇītabhojanāni bhuñjanti. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu evaṃ na āhāreti.
“不为装饰”是指:不是为了装饰身体而吃东西。在这里,那些靠色相谋生的女人、后宫嫔妃等人,会喝酥油和糖浆之类,她们吃滑润、柔软、细嫩的食物,心里想:“这样我们的肢体就会匀称,身上的肤色就会明净。”但这位比丘不是这样吃东西的。巴利
Na maṇḍanāyāti sarīramaṇḍanatthāya na āhāreti. Tattha rūpūpajīviniyo mātugāmā antepurikādayo ca sappiphāṇitaṃ nāma pivanti, te hi siniddhaṃ muduṃ mandaṃ bhojanaṃ āhārenti ‘evaṃ no aṅgalaṭṭhi susaṇṭhitā bhavissati, sarīre chavivaṇṇo pasanno bhavissatī’ti. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu evaṃ na āhāreti.
“不为打扮”是指:不是为了装饰身体而吃东西。在这里,摔跤手、拳师等人用非常滑嫩的鱼肉等食物来养壮身上的肌肉,心想:“这样我们的肌肉就会鼓起来,好承受打击。”但这位比丘不是这样,不是为了装饰身体的肌肉而吃东西。巴利
Na vibhūsanāyāti sarīre maṃsavibhūsanatthāya na āhāreti. Tattha nibbuddhamallamuṭṭhikamallādayo susiniddhehi macchamaṃsādīhi sarīramaṃsaṃ pīṇenti ‘evaṃ no maṃsaṃ ussadaṃ bhavissati pahārasahanatthāyā’ti. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu evaṃ sarīre maṃsavibhūsanatthāya na āhāreti.
“只是为了这个目的”是为了说明取用食物的目的有其限定和确定。“为了这个身体的存续”是为了维持这个由四大种所成的、由业所生的身体而取用食物,这就是取用食物的目的。“为了延续”是为了维持命根而取用食物。“为了止息伤害”中,“伤害”指的是因为没吃东西而产生的饥饿,为了止息它、让它平息而取用食物。“为了助成梵行”中,“梵行”指的是三学、整个教法,为了助成这个梵行而取用食物。巴利
Yāvadevāti āhārāharaṇe payojanassa paricchedaniyamadassanaṃ. Imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyāti imassa catumahābhūtikakarajakāyassa ṭhapanatthāya āhāreti. Idamassa āhārāharaṇe payojananti attho. Yāpanāyāti jīvitindriyayāpanatthāya āhāreti. Vihiṃsūparatiyāti vihiṃsā nāma abhuttapaccayā uppajjanakā khuddā. Tassā uparatiyā vūpasamanatthāya āhāreti. Brahmacariyānuggahāyāti brahmacariyaṃ nāma tisso sikkhā, sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ, tassa anuggaṇhanatthāya āhāreti.
“如此”是显示方法;意思是“用这个方法”。“我要消除旧受”中的“旧受”,是指因为还没吃东西而生起的感受。为了消除它而进食。“我要不让新受生起”中的“新受”,是指因为吃太多而生起的感受。为了不让它生起而进食。或者,“新受”是指由已吃下的食物为缘而不生起的感受,为了让那尚未生起的感受不生起而进食。“我将得以维持”是指我将活下去。“以及没有过失”这里,有过失,也有没有过失。其中,以不如法的方式寻求、以不如法的方式接受、以不如法的方式享用,这叫做“有过失”。以如法的方式寻求、以如法的方式接受、省察之后享用,这叫做“没有过失”。有些人把本来没有过失的事变成有过失:心想“我得到了”,就吃得超过限度。没办法消化,就因上吐下泻等而受苦。寺院里的比丘们为了照顾他的身体、寻找药物等而忙碌。有人问“这是怎么回事”时,他们就说“某某比丘肚子胀起来了”之类的话。他们批评、指责说:“这人平时就一直这样,本性如此,根本不知道自己的肚量。”这就是把本来没有过失的事变成有过失。不这样做,而是想着“我要做到没有过失”而进食。巴利
Itīti upāyanidassanaṃ; iminā upāyenāti attho. Purāṇañca vedanaṃ paṭihaṅkhāmīti purāṇavedanā nāma abhuttappaccayā uppajjanakavedanā. Taṃ paṭihanissāmīti āhāreti. Navañca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmīti navavedanā nāma atibhuttappaccayena uppajjanakavedanā. Taṃ na uppādessāmīti āhāreti. Atha vā, ‘navavedanā’ nāma bhuttappaccayā nauppajjanakavedanā. Tassā anuppannāya anuppajjanatthameva āhāreti. Yātrā ca me bhavissatīti yāpanā ca me bhavissati. Anavajjatā cāti ettha atthi sāvajjaṃ atthi anavajjaṃ. Tattha adhammikapariyesanā adhammikapaṭiggahaṇaṃ adhammena paribhogoti idaṃ ‘sāvajjaṃ’ nāma. Dhammena pariyesitvā dhammena paṭiggahetvā paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjanaṃ ‘anavajjaṃ’ nāma. Ekacco anavajjeyeva sāvajjaṃ karoti, ‘laddhaṃ me’ti katvā pamāṇātikkantaṃ bhuñjati. Taṃ jīrāpetuṃ asakkonto uddhaṃvirecanaadhovirecanādīhi kilamati. Sakalavihāre bhikkhū tassa sarīrapaṭijagganabhesajjapariyesanādīsu ussukkaṃ āpajjanti. ‘Kiṃ ida’nti vutte ‘asukassa nāma udaraṃ uddhumāta’ntiādīni vadanti. ‘Esa niccakālampi evaṃpakatikoyeva, attano kucchipamāṇaṃ nāma na jānātī’ti nindanti garahanti. Ayaṃ anavajjeyeva sāvajjaṃ karoti nāma. Evaṃ akatvā ‘anavajjatā ca bhavissatī’ti āhāreti.
说到“安乐住”,这里也有安乐住和非安乐住两种情况。其中,五种婆罗门的吃法就叫非安乐住,也就是:取手者、衣已足者、就地翻滚者、乌鸦啄食者、食已呕吐者。这五种人当中,“取手者”是吃得太多,自己已经站不起来,只能喊“把手拿过来”;“衣已足者”是肚子胀得太大,就算站起来也没法穿好衣服;“就地翻滚者”是站不起来,就地打滚;“乌鸦啄食者”是食物一直塞到嘴边,像乌鸦能来啄一样;“食已呕吐者”是嘴里含不住,当场就吐出来。不这样吃,而是想着“我要安乐住”来吃东西。所谓安乐住,就是吃到还差四五口就停下,让肚子不满。只吃这么多,然后再喝水,行、住、坐、卧四种姿势都能轻松自在地进行。所以法将这样说:巴利
Phāsuvihāro cāti etthāpi atthi phāsuvihāro atthi na phāsuvihāro. Tattha ‘āharahatthako alaṃsāṭako tatthavaṭṭako kākamāsako bhuttavamitako’ti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ bhojanaṃ na phāsuvihāro nāma. Etesu hi ‘āharahatthako’ nāma bahuṃ bhuñjitvā attano dhammatāya uṭṭhātuṃ asakkonto ‘āhara hattha’nti vadati. ‘Alaṃsāṭako’ nāma accuddhumātakucchitāya uṭṭhitopi sāṭakaṃ nivāsetuṃ na sakkoti. ‘Tatthavaṭṭako’ nāma uṭṭhātuṃ asakkonto tattheva parivaṭṭati. ‘Kākamāsako’ nāma yathā kākehi āmasituṃ sakkā hoti, evaṃ yāva mukhadvārā āhāreti. ‘Bhuttavamitako’ nāma mukhena sandhāretuṃ asakkonto tattheva vamati. Evaṃ akatvā ‘phāsuvihāro ca me bhavissatī’ti āhāreti. Phāsuvihāro nāma catūhi pañcahi ālopehi ūnūdaratā. Ettakañhi bhuñjitvā pānīyaṃ pivato cattāro iriyāpathā sukhena pavattanti. Tasmā dhammasenāpati evamāha –
不吃四五口饭,就喝水;
这足以让心志坚定的比丘安住于安乐。巴利
‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
在这里,应当把各个支分归纳起来。“不为嬉戏”是一支,“不为骄慢”是一支,“不为装饰”是一支,“不为庄严”是一支,“只是为了这个身体的维持和延续”是一支,“为了停止伤害、为了资助梵行”是一支,“这样,我要消除旧的感受,不让新的感受生起”是一支,“我将能够维持下去”是一支。没有过失和安乐住,就是这里饮食的利益。大西瓦长老则说:下面四支叫作遮止,上面八支应当归纳。其中,“只是为了这个身体的维持”是一支,“为了延续”是一支,“为了停止伤害”是一支,“为了资助梵行”是一支,“这样,我要消除旧的感受”是一支,“不让新的感受生起”是一支,“我将能够维持下去”是一支,“没有过失”是一支;安乐住则是饮食的利益。这样,进食时具备八支的人,就叫作于食知量。这就是所说的:在寻求、接受和受用食物时,以恰当的分量来观察而受用,这叫作于食知量。巴利
Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne aṅgāni samodhānetabbāni. ‘Neva davāyā’tihi ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘na madāyā’ti ekaṃ, ‘na maṇḍanāyā’ti ekaṃ, ‘na vibhūsanāyā’ti ekaṃ, ‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā yāpanāyā’ti ekaṃ, ‘vihiṃsūparatiyā brahmacariyānuggahāyā’ti ekaṃ, ‘iti purāṇañca vedanaṃ paṭihaṅkhāmi navañca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmī’ti ekaṃ, ‘yātrā ca me bhavissatī’ti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ. Anavajjatā ca phāsuvihāro cāti ayamettha bhojanānisaṃso. Mahāsīvatthero panāha – heṭṭhā cattāri aṅgāni paṭikkhepo nāma. Upari pana aṭṭhaṅgāni samodhānetabbānīti – tattha ‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā’ti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘yāpanāyā’ti ekaṃ, ‘vihiṃsūparatiyāti’ ekaṃ, ‘brahmacariyānuggahāyā’ti ekaṃ, ‘iti purāṇañca vedanaṃ paṭihaṅkhāmī’ti ekaṃ, ‘navañca vedanaṃ na uppādessāmī’ti ekaṃ, ‘yātrā ca me bhavissatī’ti ekaṃ, ‘anavajjatā’ cāti ekaṃ. Phāsuvihāro pana bhojanānisaṃsoti. Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ āhāraṃ āhārento bhojane mattaññū nāma hoti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ pariyesanapaṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu yuttappamāṇajānanavasena pavatto paccavekkhitaparibhogo bhojane mattaññutā nāma vuccati.
1356 在“失念”的解释中,“无念”是指缺少念的四种蕴。“不随念、不忆念”是把前缀加进去后扩展出来的词。“无忆念性”就是不忆念的状态。“无持性”就是没有能力执持。因为具有这种性质的人,既不能安立,也不能贮藏。就像水中的葫芦器一样,在所缘上漂浮,所以叫“漂浮性”。“忘失性”就是已经失去、已经忘掉的念。因为具有这种性质的人,就像放下食物的乌鸦,又像放下肉的豺狼。巴利
1356. Muṭṭhassaccaniddese asatīti sativirahitā cattāro khandhā. Ananussati appaṭissatīti upasaggavasena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Asaraṇatāti asaraṇākāro. Adhāraṇatāti dhāretuṃ asamatthatā. Tāya hi samannāgato puggalo ādhānappatto nidhānakkhamo na hoti. Udake alābukaṭāhaṃ viya ārammaṇe pilavatīti pilāpanatā. Saṃmusanatāti naṭṭhamuṭṭhassatitā. Tāya hi samannāgato puggalo nikkhittabhatto viya kāko, nikkhittamaṃso viya ca siṅgālo hoti.
1361 在解释修习力时,说到“诸善法”,指的是诸菩提分法;“亲近修习”就是初习。“修习”就是增长。“多作”就是一次又一次地去做。巴利
1361. Bhāvanābalaniddese kusalānaṃ dhammānanti bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ āsevanāti ādisevanā. Bhāvanāti vaḍḍhanā. Bahulīkammanti punappunaṃ karaṇaṃ.
1368 戒坏的解释,要从戒具足的解释的反面来理解。见坏的解释,要从见具足的解释的反面来理解;见具足的解释,要从见取的解释的反面来理解。戒清净的解释,虽然和戒具足的解释一样,但那里讲的是能使人达到清净的巴帝摩卡防护戒,这里讲的是已经达到清净的戒。念与正知、审察力与修习力、止与观、止相与策励相、策励与不散乱、戒具足与见具足——通过这六对,四地所摄的世间法和出世间法都已经讲到了。巴利
1368. Sīlavipattiniddeso sīlasampadāniddesapaṭipakkhato veditabbo. Diṭṭhivipattiniddeso ca diṭṭhisampadāniddesapaṭipakkhato diṭṭhisampadāniddeso ca diṭṭhupādānaniddesapaṭipakkhato. Sīlavisuddhiniddeso kiñcāpi sīlasampadāniddesena samāno, tattha pana visuddhisampāpakaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha visuddhippattaṃ sīlaṃ. Sati ca sampajaññañca, paṭisaṅkhānabalañca bhāvanābalañca, samatho ca vipassanā ca, samathanimittañca paggahanimittañca, paggāho ca avikkhepo ca, sīlasampadā ca diṭṭhisampadā cāti imehi pana chahi dukehi catubhūmakāpi lokiyalokuttaradhammāva kathitā.
1373 在“见清净”的解释中,“业自性智”是指了知“此业是自己的,此业不是自己的”的智慧。在这里,无论是自己做的,还是别人做的,一切不善业都不是自己的。为什么呢?因为它破坏利益、产生不利。而善业因为破坏不利、产生利益,所以称为“自己的”。在这里,就像有一个拥有财富和受用的人,走上长途旅程,途中在村落、城镇等地遇到节庆喧闹,他不去想“我是客人,该依靠谁来过节”,而是随自己的意愿,用各种方式过节,快乐地越过荒野;同样,安住在这个业自性智中,这些众生虽然积集了许多导向轮回的业,却能快乐地享受安乐,最终证得阿罗汉果,数量多到无法计算。“谛随顺智”是指随顺四谛的观智。“具足道者的智、具足果者的智”就是指道智和果智本身。巴利
1373. Diṭṭhivisuddhiniddese kammassakataññāṇanti ‘idaṃ kammaṃ sakaṃ, idaṃ no saka’nti jānanapaññā. Tattha attanā vā kataṃ hotu parena vā sabbampi akusalakammaṃ no sakaṃ. Kasmā? Atthabhañjanato anatthajananato ca. Kusalakammaṃ pana anatthabhañjanato atthajananato ca ‘sakaṃ’ nāma. Tattha yathā nāma sadhano sabhogo puriso addhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjitvā antarāmagge gāmanigamādīsu nakkhatte saṅghuṭṭhe ‘ahaṃ āgantuko, kaṃ nu kho nissāya nakkhattaṃ kīḷeyya’nti acintetvā yathā yathā icchati tena tena nīhārena nakkhattaṃ kīḷanto sukhena kantāraṃ atikkamati, evameva imasmiṃ kammassakataññāṇe ṭhatvā ime sattā bahuṃ vaṭṭagāmikammaṃ āyūhitvā sukhena sukhaṃ anubhavantā arahattaṃ pattā gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā. Saccānulomikañāṇanti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ anulomaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Maggasamaṅgissa ñāṇaṃ phalasamaṅgissa ñāṇanti maggañāṇaphalañāṇāniyeva.
1374 在解释“然而见清净”这个词时,通过“慧、了知”等词句,只是分别说明了前面已经讲过的业自性智等四种智。巴利
1374. ‘Diṭṭhivisuddhi kho panā’tipadassa niddese yā paññā pajānanātiādīhi padehi heṭṭhā vuttāni kammassakataññāṇādīneva cattāri ñāṇāni vibhattāni.
1375 在解释“如所见者的精勤”这个词时,通过“心所的精进努力”等词句所说明的精进,只是跟随智慧而行的;因为应当知道,随着智慧在世间的场合,[精进]便是世间的,在出世间的场合,[精进]便是出世间的。巴利
1375.‘Yathādiṭṭhissaca padhāna’nti padassa niddese yo cetasiko vīriyārambhotiādīhi padehi niddiṭṭhaṃ vīriyaṃ paññāgatikameva; paññāya hi lokiyaṭṭhāne lokiyaṃ lokuttaraṭṭhāne lokuttaranti veditabbaṃ.
1376 在“悚惧”这一双联项目的解释中,“生之怖畏”指的是:把生看作可怕,因而安住下来的智慧。对于老之怖畏、死之怖畏等,也是同样的道理。巴利
1376. Saṃvegadukaniddese jātibhayanti jātiṃ bhayato disvā ṭhitañāṇaṃ. Jarāmaraṇabhayādīsupi eseva nayo.
1377 通过“未生之恶”等语句,说明了这样一层意思:当一个人把生等看作可怕的事,想要从生、老、病、死中解脱出来时,所应当采用的善巧方法和精勤努力。至于逐词分别解释的含义,将在《分别论注》(觉支品注释)中清楚说明。巴利
1377.Anuppannānaṃ pāpakānantiādīhi jātiādīni bhayato disvā jātijarābyādhimaraṇehi muccitukāmassa upāyapadhānaṃ kathitaṃ. Padabhājanīyassa panattho vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 367 bojjhaṅgapabbavaṇṇanā) āvi bhavissati.
1378 对“于诸善法中不满足”这一句的解释里,“更欲求”指的是对殊胜之境的欲求。这里,有人一开始只是布施半月食、筹食、布萨食或斋日食,他对这些不满足,于是又布施常供食、僧团食、雨安居食,建造住所,甚至布施四种资具。对这些仍然不满足,就去皈依三宝,受持五戒。对此仍不满足,就出家。出家之后,他学通一部尼柯耶、两部尼柯耶,乃至通达三藏佛语,修习八种等至,增长观智,最终证得阿拉汉果。从证得阿拉汉果那一刻起,他才真正称为大满足者。像这样,一直到证得阿拉汉果为止,这种对殊胜之境的欲求就叫作“更欲求”。巴利
1378.‘Asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesū’ti padaniddese bhiyyokamyatāti visesakāmatā. Idhekacco hi āditova pakkhikabhattaṃ vā salākabhattaṃ vā uposathikaṃ vā pāṭipadikaṃ vā deti, so tena asantuṭṭho hutvā puna dhurabhattaṃ saṅghabhattaṃ vassāvāsikaṃ deti, āvāsaṃ kāreti, cattāropi paccaye deti. Tatrāpi asantuṭṭho hutvā saraṇāni gaṇhāti, pañca sīlāni samādiyati. Tatrāpi asantuṭṭho hutvā pabbajati. Pabbajitvā ekaṃ nikāyaṃ dve nikāyeti tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ gaṇhāti, aṭṭha samāpattiyo bhāveti, vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhāti . Arahattappattito paṭṭhāya mahāsantuṭṭho nāma hoti. Evaṃ yāva arahattā visesakāmatā ‘bhiyyokamyatā’ nāma.
1379 在解释“于精进不退缩”这一词句时,因为有人在偏远寂静的住处,对修习增上善法感到厌倦,这就叫作“退缩精进”;如果不感到厌倦,就叫作“不退缩”。因此,为了说明这个道理,便说了“于善法”等语。其中,“恭敬行”是指恭敬地行持善法;“常行”是指恒常不断地行持;“无间行”是指不中断、不停止地行持;“不退缩行”是指不怯懦地生活,或者不怯懦地运作;“不舍欲”是指不舍弃对善法的欲求;“不舍担”是指不舍弃行持善法时的精进之担。巴利
1379.‘Appaṭivānitā ca padhānasmi’nti padassa niddese yasmā pantasenāsanesu adhikusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya ukkaṇṭhamāno padhānaṃ paṭivāseti nāma , anukkaṇṭhamāno no paṭivāseti nāma, tasmā taṃ nayaṃ dassetuṃ yā kusalānaṃ dhammānantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sakkaccakiriyatāti kusalānaṃ karaṇe sakkaccakāritā. Sātaccakiriyatāti satatameva karaṇaṃ. Aṭṭhitakiriyatāti khaṇḍaṃ akatvā aṭṭhapetvā karaṇaṃ. Anolīnavuttitāti alīnajīvitā, alīnapavattitā vā. Anikkhittachandatāti kusalacchandassa anikkhipanaṃ. Anikkhittadhuratāti kusalakaraṇe vīriyadhurassa anikkhipanaṃ.
1380 “宿住随念智为明”这句话里,“宿住”是指过去世曾经居住的诸蕴,以及和这些蕴相关联的事物。对宿住的随念,就是宿住随念;与这种随念相应的智,就是宿住随念智。这个智能穿透覆盖过去世诸蕴的黑暗,所以叫“明”;它穿透那黑暗之后,让那些蕴被了知、被显现出来,所以从“令了知”这个意义上说,也叫“明”。巴利
1380.‘Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃvijjā’ti ettha pubbenivāsoti pubbe nivutthakkhandhā ca khandhapaṭibaddhañca. Pubbenivāsassa anussati pubbenivāsānussati. Tāya sampayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ. Tayidaṃ pubbe nivutthakkhandhapaṭicchādakaṃ tamaṃ vijjhatīti vijjā. Taṃ tamaṃ vijjhitvā te khandhe vidite pākaṭe karotīti viditakaraṇaṭṭhenāpi vijjā.
“死生智”就是关于死和结生的智。这个智也穿透覆盖众生死与结生的黑暗,所以叫“明”。它穿透那黑暗之后,让众生的死与结生了知、显现出来,所以从“令了知”这个意义上说,也是“明”。“漏尽智”就是在一切烦恼灭尽时的智。它穿透覆盖四圣谛的黑暗,所以叫“明”。它穿透那黑暗之后,让四圣谛了知、显现出来,所以从“令了知”这个意义上说,也是“明”。巴利
Cutūpapāte ñāṇanti cutiyañca upapāte ca ñāṇaṃ. Idampi sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhicchādakaṃ tamaṃ vijjhatīti vijjā. Taṃ tamaṃ vijjhitvā sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhiyo viditā pākaṭā karotīti viditakaraṇaṭṭhenāpi vijjā. Āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇanti sabbakilesānaṃ khayasamaye ñāṇaṃ. Tayidaṃ catusaccacchādakatamaṃ vijjhatīti vijjā. Taṃ tamaṃ vijjhitvā cattāri saccāni viditāni pākaṭāni karotīti viditakaraṇaṭṭhenāpi vijjā.
1381 “心之胜解与涅槃”这一句里,八种等至因为以所缘为对象而决意信解,又因为从敌对法中彻底解脱,所以称为“心的胜解”。另一种则是涅槃,因为“这里没有被称为渴爱的编织”,或者说“已经从那编织中脱离出来”。其中,八种等至由于自身已镇伏烦恼而解脱,所以说为“解脱”;涅槃则由于从一切烦恼中究竟解脱,所以是“解脱”。巴利
1381.‘Cittassaca adhimutti nibbānañcā’ti ettha ārammaṇe adhimuccanaṭṭhena, paccanīkadhammehi ca suṭṭhumuttaṭṭhena aṭṭha samāpattiyo cittassa adhimutti nāma. Itaraṃ pana ‘natthi ettha taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ vānaṃ’, ‘niggataṃ vā tasmā vānā’ti nibbānaṃ. Tattha aṭṭha samāpattiyo sayaṃ vikkhambhitakilesehi vimuttattā vimuttīti vuttā, nibbānaṃ pana sabbakilesehi accantaṃ vimuttattā vimuttīti.
1382 与道俱足者相应的智,就是四种道智;与果俱足者相应的智,就是四种果智。其中,初道智生起时,正在刺激、灭尽、止息、平息、寂止五种烦恼,所以称为“尽智”。第二道智灭尽四种烦恼,第三道智也是这样。第四道智生起时,正在刺激、灭尽、止息、平息、寂止八种烦恼,所以称为“尽智”。而那一一对应的道果智,是在那些烦恼已尽、已灭、已止息、已寂止、不再生起、不再转起之后才生起的,因此称为“无生智”。巴利
1382.Maggasamaṅgissañāṇanti cattāri maggañāṇāni. Phalasamaṅgissa ñāṇanti cattāri phalañāṇāni. Tattha paṭhamamaggañāṇaṃ pañca kilese khepentaṃ nirodhentaṃ vūpasamentaṃ paṭippassambhentaṃ uppajjatīti khaye ñāṇaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Dutiyamaggañāṇaṃ cattāro kilese. Tathā tatiyamaggañāṇaṃ. Catutthamaggañāṇaṃ pana aṭṭha kilese khepentaṃ nirodhentaṃ vūpasamentaṃ paṭippassambhentaṃ uppajjatīti ‘khaye ñāṇaṃ’ nāma jātaṃ. Taṃ taṃ maggaphalañāṇaṃ pana tesaṃ tesaṃ kilesānaṃ khīṇante niruddhante vūpasamante paṭippassambhante anuppādante appavattante uppannanti anuppāde ñāṇaṃ nāma jātanti.